EP4527781A1 - Integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly - Google Patents
Integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP4527781A1 EP4527781A1 EP24199096.9A EP24199096A EP4527781A1 EP 4527781 A1 EP4527781 A1 EP 4527781A1 EP 24199096 A EP24199096 A EP 24199096A EP 4527781 A1 EP4527781 A1 EP 4527781A1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- upper boom
- boom portion
- adapter
- base mount
- coupling
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B66—HOISTING; LIFTING; HAULING
- B66F—HOISTING, LIFTING, HAULING OR PUSHING, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, e.g. DEVICES WHICH APPLY A LIFTING OR PUSHING FORCE DIRECTLY TO THE SURFACE OF A LOAD
- B66F9/00—Devices for lifting or lowering bulky or heavy goods for loading or unloading purposes
- B66F9/06—Devices for lifting or lowering bulky or heavy goods for loading or unloading purposes movable, with their loads, on wheels or the like, e.g. fork-lift trucks
- B66F9/075—Constructional features or details
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B66—HOISTING; LIFTING; HAULING
- B66F—HOISTING, LIFTING, HAULING OR PUSHING, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, e.g. DEVICES WHICH APPLY A LIFTING OR PUSHING FORCE DIRECTLY TO THE SURFACE OF A LOAD
- B66F9/00—Devices for lifting or lowering bulky or heavy goods for loading or unloading purposes
- B66F9/06—Devices for lifting or lowering bulky or heavy goods for loading or unloading purposes movable, with their loads, on wheels or the like, e.g. fork-lift trucks
- B66F9/075—Constructional features or details
- B66F9/20—Means for actuating or controlling masts, platforms, or forks
- B66F9/24—Electrical devices or systems
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates to an integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly and more specifically to an integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly having a yielding adapter that allows for controlled failure of the boom assembly.
- a boom assembly may be used to position an accessory such as a camera at a desired vertical and/or horizontal position.
- a boom assembly comprises: an upper boom portion, a base mount, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion.
- the upper boom portion may be aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position.
- an integrity monitoring system comprising at least one sensor associated with the boom assembly, wherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed angular position relative to the base mount.
- the at least one sensor may be configured to detect a parameter related to the upper boom portion to indicate that the upper boom portion has deflected such that the upper boom portion is no longer aligned with the base mount.
- the sensor may detect an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- the predetermined threshold may be calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold.
- the sensor may detect an angular velocity of the upper boom portion, wherein the angular velocity of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- the sensor may comprise a strain gauge that detects a strain level in the adapter, wherein the strain level in the adapter exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- the sensor may detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion relative to a predetermined reference, wherein the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- the at least one sensor may be configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing the parameter.
- the boom assembly may further comprise at least one controller configured to: receive the at least one signal; and determine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- the at least one controller may be further configured to generate an alert in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- a materials handling vehicle comprising: a power unit; a load handling assembly extending from the power unit and comprising a pair of forks; an operator's station comprising an operator's backrest and an operator's platform; a boom assembly associated with the materials handling vehicle; and an integrity monitoring system comprising at least one sensor mounted to at least one of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station.
- the boom assembly may comprise a base mount, an upper boom portion, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion.
- the upper boom portion may be aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position, wherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount.
- the at least one sensor may be configured to detect a parameter related to the upper boom portion to indicate that the upper boom portion has deflected such that the upper boom portion is no longer aligned with the base mount.
- the at least one sensor may be configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing a corresponding parameter.
- the materials handling vehicle may further comprise at least one controller configured to: receive the at least one signal; and determine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- the materials handling vehicle may further comprise a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor, and wherein in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield, the at least one controller is configured to generate an error code that activates the brake and/or alters operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor.
- the at least one controller may be configured to: generate an error code; and transmit a signal that causes a user interface to display an indication of the error code.
- the sensor may detect an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- the predetermined threshold may be calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold.
- the sensor may detect an angular velocity of the upper boom portion, wherein the angular velocity of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- the sensor may comprise a strain gauge that detects a strain level in the adapter, wherein the strain level in the adapter exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- the sensor may detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion relative to a predetermined reference, wherein the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- a method of controlling a materials handling vehicle comprises: a power unit, a load handling assembly, an operator's station, a boom assembly, and an integrity monitoring system.
- the boom assembly may comprise a base mount, an upper boom portion, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion.
- the upper boom portion may be aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position and the adapter may be configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount.
- the integrity monitoring system may comprise at least one controller and at least one sensor mounted to one or more of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station.
- the method may comprise: receiving, by the at least one controller, at least one signal from the at least one sensor; and determining, by the at least one controller, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount.
- the materials handling vehicle may further comprise a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor.
- the method may further comprise: in response to determining that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount, generating, by the at least one controller, an error code; and based on the error code, activating the brake and/or altering operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor.
- the method may further comprise: restarting the materials handling vehicle; operating the material handling vehicle in limp mode, wherein a speed of the materials handling vehicle is limited; moving the materials handling vehicle in limp mode from a first location to a second location; replacing at least a portion of one or more of the base mount, the upper boom portion, the adapter, or the at least one sensor; clearing the error code; restarting the materials handling vehicle; and resuming normal operation of the materials handling vehicle.
- the method may further comprise: replacing at least a portion of one or more of the base mount, the upper boom portion, the adapter, or the at least one sensor; clearing the error code; restarting the materials handling vehicle; and resuming normal operation of the materials handling vehicle.
- any embodiment of any aspect of the invention may be combined with any other aspect and embodiment described herein, unless such combination is clearly incompatible, and all such combinations are envisaged and disclosed herein.
- the boom assembly and all of its optional features and embodiments as disclosed herein above and below, including the claims (e.g. according to the first aspect) may be combined with any materials handling vehicle and its optional features and embodiments as disclosed herein above and below, including the claims (e.g. according to the second aspect).
- the methods and all of its optional features and embodiments as disclosed herein above and below, including the claims may be combined with any materials handling vehicle of the disclosure, and/or with any boom assembly of the disclosure.
- FIGS. 1A , 1B , and 39 A materials handling vehicle constructed in accordance with the present disclosure is shown in FIGS. 1A , 1B , and 39 .
- the materials handling vehicle is depicted as a low level order picking truck 10 that includes a load handling assembly 12 extending from a power unit 14.
- the load handling assembly 12 includes a pair of forks 16, each fork 16 having a load supporting wheel assembly 18.
- the load handling assembly 12 may include other load handling features in addition to, or in lieu of, the illustrated arrangement of the forks 16, such as scissors-type elevating forks, outriggers, or separate height adjustable forks.
- the load handling assembly 12 may include load handling features such as a mast, a load platform, collection cage, or other support structure carried by the forks 16 or otherwise provided for handling a load supported and carried by the truck 10 or pushed or pulled by the truck 10, i.e., such as by a tugger vehicle.
- a compartment 44 may contain a battery, control electronics, and motor(s) (not shown), such as a traction motor/brake assembly, steer motor, and/or lift motor for the forks 16.
- the traction motor/brake assembly may be coupled to a steerable drive wheel 22 for driving and braking the drive wheel 22.
- First and second caster wheels (only the first caster wheel 46 is illustrated) are coupled to opposing sides of the power unit 14.
- the illustrated power unit 14 comprises a step-through operator's station 30 defined by an operator's backrest 34, a side wall 48 of the compartment 44, and a floorboard or operator's platform 32.
- the operator may stand on the operator's platform 32 to drive the truck 10 (see FIG. 39 ), and/or the operator's platform 32 may provide a position from which the operator may operate the various included features of the truck 10.
- a control area 40 provides for driving the truck 10 and for controlling the features of the load handling assembly 12.
- the control area 40 comprises a handle 52 for steering the truck 10, which may include controls such as grips, butterfly switches, thumbwheels, rocker switches, a hand wheel, a steering tiller, etc., for controlling the acceleration/braking and travel direction of the truck 10.
- a control such as a switch grip (not labeled) may be provided on the handle 52, which is spring biased to a center neutral position.
- Rotating the switch grip forward and upward will cause the truck 10 to move forward, e.g., power unit first, at an acceleration proportional to the amount of rotation of the switch grip until the truck 10 reaches a predefined maximum speed, at which point the truck 10 is no longer permitted to accelerate to a higher speed.
- the truck 10 will accelerate at approximately 50% of the maximum acceleration capable for the truck 10 until the truck 10 reaches 50% of the maximum speed capable for the truck 10. It is also contemplated that acceleration may be determined using an acceleration map stored in memory where the rotation angle of the grip is used as an input into and has a corresponding acceleration value in the acceleration map.
- the acceleration values in the acceleration map corresponding to the grip rotation angles may be proportional to the grip rotation angles or vary in any desired manner.
- One or more proximity or presence sensors 58 may be provided to detect the presence of an operator on the truck 10.
- presence sensor(s) 58 may be located on, above, or under a floor of the operator's platform 32, or otherwise provided about the operator's station 30.
- the presence sensor(s) 58 is/are shown in dashed lines indicating that it/they is/are positioned under the floor of the operator's platform 32.
- the presence sensor(s) 58 may comprise load sensors, switches, etc.
- the presence sensor(s) 58 may be implemented above the floor of the operator's platform 32, such as by using ultrasonic, capacitive, or other suitable sensing technology.
- the presence sensor 58 generates an operator status signal indicating that either an operator is standing on the operator's platform 32 in the operator's station 30 or no operator is standing on the operator's platform 32 in the operator's station 30.
- a change in the operator status signal indicates that an operator has either entered or exited the operator's station 30.
- an antenna 66 extends vertically from the power unit 14 and is provided for receiving control signals from a corresponding wireless remote control device (not shown). It is also contemplated that the antenna 66 may be provided within the compartment 44 of the power unit 14 or elsewhere on the truck 10.
- the remote control device may comprise a transmitter that is worn or otherwise maintained by the operator.
- the remote control device is manually operable by an operator, e.g., by pressing a button or other control, to cause the remote control device to wirelessly transmit at least a first type of signal designating a travel request to the truck 10.
- the travel request is a command that requests the corresponding truck 10 to travel by a predetermined amount.
- the truck 10 may also comprise one or more obstacle sensors (not shown), which are provided about the truck 10, e.g., towards a front end of the power unit 14 and/or to the sides of the power unit 14.
- the obstacle sensor(s) may include at least one contactless obstacle sensor on the truck 10 and may be operable to define at least one detection zone.
- the obstacle sensor(s) may comprise any suitable proximity detection technology, such as one or more ultrasonic sensors, optical recognition devices, infrared sensors, laser scanner sensors, etc., which may be capable of detecting the presence of objects/obstacles or may be capable of generating signals that can be analyzed to detect the presence of objects/obstacles within the predefined detection zone(s) of the power unit 14.
- the truck 10 may be implemented in other formats, styles and features, such as an end control pallet truck that includes a steering tiller arm that is coupled to a tiller handle for steering the truck.
- the truck, remote control system, and/or components thereof, including the remote control device may comprise any additional and/or alternative features or implementations, examples of which are disclosed in any one or more of the following commonly owned patents/published patent applications: U.S. Pat. No. 9,082,293, issued Jul. 14, 2015 entitled “SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF REMOTELY CONTROLLING A MATERIALS HANDLING VEHICLE”; U.S. Pat. No. 8,072,309, issued Dec.
- the truck 10 may comprise the operator's backrest 34 and a separate load backrest 20.
- the operator's backrest 34 faces toward the power unit 14 and is fixed to the operator's platform 32, such that the operator's backrest 34 does not move vertically relative to the operator's platform 32.
- the truck 10 may comprise a single backrest that serves as both the operator's backrest and the load backrest.
- the operator's backrest 34 may comprise a wall 50 extending generally vertically above the operator's platform 32 and a support pad 36 coupled to the wall 50. During operation of the truck 10, the operator may stand against the support pad 36.
- a boom assembly 100, 1100 may be associated with, i.e., coupled to, the truck 10, and an accessory 300 may be coupled to the boom assembly 100, 1100.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 is removably coupled to the operator's backrest 34, as described herein.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 may be welded or otherwise secured directly to the operator's backrest 34.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 may be offset from the operator's backrest 34 and may be secured to another component of the truck 10, such as the load handling assembly 12.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 may extend above the operator's station 30 and over the forks 16, such that the accessory 300 is positioned above the forks 16.
- the accessory 300 may comprise, for example, a camera or other imaging device, a light detection and ranging (Lidar) device, a light or object/image projecting device, a sound emitting device, a wireless internet device, or any combination thereof.
- Lidar light detection and ranging
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 comprises a lower boom portion 102, 1102 (referred to herein as a base mount) and an upper boom portion 104, 1104.
- the base mount 102, 1102 is coupled to the upper boom portion 104, 1104 via an adapter 150, 1150, 2150 that is configured to yield when the upper boom portion 104, 1104, or at least one coupling member thereof, is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150, or at least one coupling member thereof, to yield, such that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 102, 1102, as described herein.
- the base mount 102, 1102 may comprise a main body 106, 1106, a first flange 108A, a second flange 108B, a first bracket 116A, and a second bracket 116B.
- the first and second flanges 108A, 108B are coupled and secured to the main body 106, 1106, e.g., via welding.
- the main body 106, 1106 is hollow and comprises a generally rectangular cross-section. In other examples, the main body 106, 1106 may comprise a different shape than that shown, such as a circular cross-sectional shape.
- the base mount 102, 1102 may be coupled to the operator's backrest 34 via the first and second flanges 108A, 108B and the first and second brackets 116A, 116B.
- the first and second flanges 108A, 108B may be positioned on one side of the operator's backrest 34, e.g., facing toward the power unit 14 (not visible in FIGS. 2-5 ; see FIGS. 1A and 1B ), and the first and second brackets 116A, 116B may be positioned opposite the first and second flanges 108A, 108B, e.g., facing toward the forks 16 (not visible in FIGS. 2-5 ; see FIGS. 1A and 1B ).
- the first and second brackets 116A, 116B may each comprise a "C" shape with a respective notch 116A-1, 116B-1 that fits over and receives a bar 38 comprising an upper portion of the operator's backrest 34.
- the main body 106, 1106 may also comprise a notch 106-1 that fits over and receives the bar 38.
- a retention plate 254 is positioned opposite the first and second brackets 116A, 116B.
- the base mount 102, 1102 may further comprise a support plate 258 coupled to the main body 106, 1106, e.g., via welding, that may at least partially surround a portion of the main body 106, 1106 adjacent to the notch 106-1.
- Fasteners 118 extend through apertures 255 formed in the retention plate 254 and are received in threaded apertures 259 formed in the support plate 258 to secure the retention plate 254 to the main body 106, 1106 of the base mount 102, 1102 via the support plate 258.
- Fasteners 119 extend through apertures 257 (only two of the apertures 257 are labeled in FIG. 2 ) formed in the retention plate 254 and are received in threaded apertures 117A, 117B formed in the first and second brackets 116A, 116B (only one of the threaded apertures 117A, 117B is labeled in FIG.
- first and second brackets 116A, 116B to secure the first and second brackets 116A, 116B to the retention plate 254, such that the bar 38 of the operator's backrest 34 is received in the notches 116A-1, 116B-1 of the first and second brackets 116A, 116B to clamp the bar 38 between the first and second brackets 116A, 116B and the retention plate 254.
- Washers may be positioned between the fasteners 118, 119 and the retention plate 254.
- an upper half (not labeled) of each of the first and second brackets 116A, 116B may extend above the bar 38, and a lower half (not labeled) of each of the first and second brackets 116A, 116B may extend below the bar 38.
- the wall 50 comprises at least one opening 50-1 through which the lower half of each of the first and second brackets 116A, 116B extends for coupling to the retention plate 254.
- the first and second brackets 116A, 116B may engage, i.e., physically contact, the retention plate 254.
- a doubler plate 256 is positioned opposite the first and second flanges 108A, 108B.
- Fasteners 112 extend through apertures 261 formed in the doubler plate 256, through apertures (not visible) formed in the wall 50 of the operator's backrest 34, and through respective apertures 109A formed in the first and second flanges 108A, 108B (only the aperture 109A in the first flange 108A is visible in FIG. 3 ) and may be secured, e.g., via nuts 114.
- a splice plate 260 may be secured to the main body 106, 1106 of the base mount 102, 1102 between the first and second brackets 116A, 116B on a side of the main body 106, 1106 opposite the retention plate 254.
- the main body 106, 1106 may comprise additional support plates 262, 264 coupled thereto, e.g., via welding, and positioned above and below the notch 106-1 (not visible in FIG. 4 ; see FIG. 2 ).
- Fasteners 266, 268 may extend through apertures 260-1 formed in the splice plate 260 (only four of the apertures 260-1 are labeled in FIG.
- Washers may be positioned between the fasteners 266, 268 and the splice plate 260.
- the base mount 102, 1102 is fixed to the operator's backrest 34, and the base mount 102, 1102, specifically the main body 106, 1106 extends generally vertically above the operator's platform 32, as shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B .
- the first and second brackets 116A, 116B, the first and second flanges 108A, 108B, the doubler plate 256, and the splice plate 260 help to stabilize the base mount 102, 1102 and secure the base mount 102, 1102 to the operator's backrest 34 and also help to stabilize the upper boom portion 104, 1104.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 may be field installable and may be configured for retrofitting to the operator's backrest 34 of existing trucks via the first and second brackets 116A, 116B and the first and second flanges 108A, 108B, as shown in FIGS. 2-4 .
- a pair of braces 272, 274 may be added to help support and strengthen the operator's backrest 34.
- the operator's backrest 34 may comprise a pair of posts 39, 41 that are coupled to the bar 38 defining the upper portion of the backrest 34, with the bar 38 extending generally horizontally between the posts 39, 41.
- One of the braces 272 may be attached to one of the posts 39, and the other brace 274 may be attached to the other post 41.
- a plurality of brackets 276A, 276B, 276C may be used to attach the brace 274 to the post 41.
- the brace 274 may comprise an "L" shape, and the brackets 276A, 276B, 276C may comprise a quadrant or quarter-circular shape that fits around the post 41.
- Fasteners 278 extend through apertures 273 formed along one edge of an upper portion of the brace 274 and are received in corresponding threaded apertures 277A, 277B, 277C formed in one end of the brackets 276A, 276B, 276C.
- Fasteners 280 extend through apertures 275 (only one aperture 275 is visible in FIG.
- brackets 276A, 276B, 276C may similarly be used to attach an upper portion of the brace 272 to the post 39.
- the braces 272, 274 may extend beyond their respective post 39, 41 and along a lower portion of the wall 50, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 .
- one or more fasteners 282 extend through one or more additional apertures 279 formed along one edge of a lower portion of the brace 274 and are received in corresponding threaded aperture(s) 51 formed in the wall 50.
- One or more fasteners 284 extend through one or more additional apertures (not visible) formed in the wall 50 and are received in corresponding threaded aperture(s) 281 formed along the other edge of the lower portion of the brace 274.
- a lower portion of the brace 272 may be attached to the wall 50 in a similar manner.
- the support pad 36 may be coupled to the operator's backrest 34 via a plurality of fasteners 270 (only two fasteners 270 are shown in FIG. 5 ) that extend through apertures (not visible) formed in the wall 50 and are received in threaded apertures formed in one or more metal plates (not visible) embedded within a polymeric pad portion of the support pad 36.
- fasteners 270 only two fasteners 270 are shown in FIG. 5
- the support pad 36 is depicted as being coupled to the operator's backrest 34 after attachment of the base mount 102, 1102 and/or the braces 272, 274, the support pad 36 may also be coupled to the backrest 34 prior to, or at the same time as, attachment of the base mount 102, 1102 and/or the braces 272, 274.
- the adapter 150 comprises an upper element 152 that is coupled to the upper boom portion 104 (the upper boom portion 104 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 ; see FIG. 11 ), a lower element 158 that is coupled to the base mount 102 (the base mount 102 is not shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 ; see FIG. 9 ), a first arm 172, a second arm 174, a first pin 180, a second pin 182, a first gas spring or first piston and cylinder unit or assembly 176, and a second gas spring or second piston and cylinder unit or assembly 178, in which the first and second gas springs 176, 178 may have a fluid in the cylinder such as a gas comprising air (in FIG. 7 , the first arm 172 and the first gas spring 176 are omitted).
- the upper element 152 comprises a pair of upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 that are received in an upper support body 156 and coupled to the upper support body 156 via fasteners 200.
- fasteners 200 extend through apertures (not visible) formed in a front side of the upper support body 156 and are received in threaded apertures (not visible) formed in the upper engagement plate 154-1 to secure the upper engagement plate 154-1 to the upper support body 156.
- fasteners 200 also extend through apertures formed in a back side of the upper support body 156 and are received in threaded apertures formed in the upper engagement plate 154-2 to secure the upper engagement plate 154-2 to the upper support body 156 (see FIG. 13 ).
- the lower element 158 comprises a pair of lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 that are received in a lower support body 162 and coupled to the lower support body 162 via fasteners 202.
- fasteners 202 extend through apertures (not visible) formed in a front side of the lower support body 162 and are received in threaded apertures (not visible) formed in the lower engagement plate 160-1 to secure the lower engagement plate 160-1 to the lower support body 162.
- fasteners also extend through apertures formed in a back side of the lower support body 162 and are received in threaded apertures formed in the lower engagement plate 160-2 to secure the lower engagement plate 160-2 to the lower support body 162 (see FIG. 13 ).
- the first arm 172 may generally comprise a flattened "S" shape with a linear section 172-1, a first end 172-2 that extends away from the linear section 172-1 in a first direction, and a second end 172-3 that extends away from the linear section 172-1 in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction (see also FIG. 27 ).
- the second arm 174 may similarly comprise a flattened "S" shape with a linear section 174-1, a first end 174-2 that extends away from the linear section 174-1 in a first direction, and a second end 174-3 that extends away from the linear section 174-1 in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction.
- the upper support body 156 comprises a first extension 156-1 that extends outward from the upper support body 156 in a first direction, and a second extension 156-2 that extends outward from the upper support body 156 in a second direction opposite the first direction.
- a first end 176-1 of the first gas spring 176 is coupled to the first extension 156-1, and a second end 176-2 of the first gas spring 176 is coupled to the first end 172-2 of the first arm 172, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 27 .
- the first arm 172 is coupled to the upper support body 156 via the first gas spring 176, which is coupled to the first extension 156-1.
- a first end 178-1 of the second gas spring 178 is similarly coupled to the second extension 156-2, and a second end 178-2 of the second gas spring 178 is coupled to the first end 174-2 of the second arm 174, as shown in FIG. 28 (see also FIG. 30 ).
- the second arm 174 is coupled to the upper support body 156 via the second gas spring 178, which is coupled to the second extension 156-2.
- the first and second gas springs 176, 178 may extend generally vertically between the respective first and second extensions 156-1, 156-2 and the first ends 172-2, 174-2 of the respective first and second arms 172, 174 and may be generally parallel to the main body 106 of the base mount 102. In other examples (not shown), the first and second gas springs 176, 178 may extend at an angle with respect to the main body 106 and the upper boom portion 104.
- the upper support body 156 comprises one hinge barrel 164 on one side and one hinge barrel 166 on the other side.
- the hinge barrel 164 may comprise a support bracket or gusset 163 extending between the hinge barrel 164 and an adjacent portion of the upper support body 156 to help support the hinge barrel 164.
- the hinge barrel 166 may similarly comprise a support bracket or gusset 167 extending between the hinge barrel 166 and an adjacent portion of the upper support body 156.
- the lower support body 162 comprises two hinge barrels 168 on one side and two hinge barrels 170 on the other side.
- Each hinge barrel 168 may comprise a support bracket or gusset 169 extending between the hinge barrels 168 and an adjacent portion of the lower support body 162.
- Each hinge barrel 170 may similarly comprise a support bracket or gusset 171 extending between the hinge barrel 170 and an adjacent portion of the lower support body 162.
- the hinge barrels 164, 168 and an aperture formed in the second end 172-3 of the first arm 172 are aligned to receive the first pin 180, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 , such that the first pin 180 couples the second end 172-3 of the first arm 172 to the upper and lower support bodies 156, 162 via the first pin 180 being received in the respective hinge barrels 164, 168 of the upper and lower support bodies 156, 162 and the aperture of the first arm 172.
- the hinge barrels 166, 170 and an aperture formed in the second end 174-3 of the second arm 174 are similarly aligned to receive the second pin 182, as shown in FIG.
- One or more spacers 181 may be placed about the first pin 180 and between the first arm 172 and the adjacent hinge barrel 168 to maintain a desired spacing between the first arm 172 and the adjacent hinge barrel 168, as shown in FIG. 7 .
- One or more spacers may similarly be placed between the second arm 174 and the adjacent hinge barrel 170 (see FIG. 28 ). As shown in FIG.
- first and second pins 180, 182 may comprise shear pins that are configured to break or shear off upon application of a shear force equal to, or in excess of, a shear force threshold value, as described herein.
- the lower support body 162 may comprise a first stop 186 and a second stop 188 extending outward from opposing sides of the lower support body 162.
- the first stop 186 may be positioned so that when the adapter 150 is in the normal, i.e., home, operating position as shown in FIG. 8 , the linear section 172-1 of the first arm 172 rests against the first stop 186, and the linear section 174-1 (see FIG. 30 ) of the second arm 174 similarly rests against the second stop 188.
- the adapter 150 may be coupled to the main body 106 of the base mount 102.
- the main body 106 of the base mount 102 comprises a plurality of apertures 107 formed on both sides.
- a front side of the main body 106 comprises four apertures 107.
- a back side of the main body 106 also comprises four apertures 107, although only a portion of the apertures 107 is visible.
- the lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 161-1, 161-2 (only the apertures 161-1 formed in the lower engagement plate 160-1 are visible in FIG. 9 ; see the apertures 161-2 formed in the lower engagement plate 160-2 in FIG. 30 ).
- the lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside the main body 106 of the base mount 102.
- the adapter 150 may be inserted into the base mount 102 so that the lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 are received in the main body 106, a lower surface of the lower support body 162 is seated against an upper surface of the main body 106, and the apertures 161 formed in the lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 are aligned with the apertures 107 formed in the main body 106.
- Fasteners 204 extend through the apertures 107 formed in the front side of the main body 106 and are received in the apertures 161 formed in the lower engagement plate 160-1. Although not visible in FIG. 10 , fasteners 204 similarly extend through apertures formed in the back side of the main body 106 and are received in apertures formed in the lower engagement plate 160-2 (see FIG. 13 ). Upon installation of the adapter 150 into the main body 106 of the base mount 102, an outer surface 165 of the lower support body 162 may be flush with an outer surface 113 of the main body 106.
- the upper boom portion 104 may be coupled to the adapter 150.
- the upper boom portion 104 is hollow and comprises a generally rectangular cross-section that corresponds to the cross-sectional shape of the base mount 102.
- the upper boom portion 104 may comprise a different shape, such as a circular cross-sectional shape.
- the upper boom portion 104 may comprise a first section 104A and a second section 104B.
- the second section 104B extends at an angle with respect to the first section 104A. In the example shown in FIGS.
- the second section 104B extends substantially perpendicular, i.e., at an angle of about 90 degrees, +/- 5 degrees, with respect to the first section 104A (see also FIG. 1A ).
- the second section 104B may extend at an angle of +/- 45 degrees from horizontal, e.g., parallel to a plane (not shown) defined by the operator's platform 32 and/or the forks 16.
- the upper boom portion 104 may comprise a single section that extends generally vertically above the operator's platform 32.
- the first and second sections 104A, 104B may be substantially equal in length.
- the first section 104A may comprise a different length than the second section 104B.
- the main body 106 and the upper boom portion 104 may have a cross section with a width dimension ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches and a length dimension ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches.
- the main body 106 and the upper boom portion 104 may be made from any metal, such as a steel, stainless steel, aluminum, etc., and may have a wall thickness ranging from 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch.
- An overall height of the boom assembly 100 i.e., the overall height of the boom assembly 100 above the forks 16 when the boom assembly 100 is installed, may range from 5.5 feet to 14 feet.
- the upper boom portion 104 comprises a plurality of apertures 105 formed on both sides.
- a front side of the upper boom portion 104 comprises four apertures 105.
- a back side of the upper boom portion 104 also comprises four apertures.
- the upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 155-1, 155-2 (only one of the apertures 155-2 formed in the upper engagement plate 154-2 is visible in FIG. 11 ; see also FIG. 30 ).
- the upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside the first section 104A of the upper boom portion 104.
- the first section 104A of the upper boom portion 104 may be placed over the upper element 152 of the adapter 150 and positioned so that the upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 are received in the first section 104A, a lower surface of the first section 104A is seated against an upper surface of the upper support body 156, and the apertures 155-1, 155-2 formed in the upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 are aligned with the apertures 105 formed in the upper boom portion 104.
- Fasteners 206 extend through the apertures 105 formed in the front side of the upper boom portion 104 and are received in the apertures 155-1 formed in the upper engagement plate 154-1. Although not visible in FIG. 12 , fasteners 206 similarly extend through apertures formed in the back side of the upper boom portion 104 and are received in the apertures 155-2 formed in the upper engagement plate 154-2 (see FIG. 13 ). Upon installation of the upper boom portion 104 onto the adapter 150, an outer surface 159 of the upper support body 156 may be flush with an outer surface 115 of the upper boom portion 104.
- the first section 104A of the upper boom portion 104 extends generally vertically above the operator's platform 32 and is generally vertically aligned with the main body 106 of the base mount 102, e.g., aligned along a vertical axis v, as shown in FIG. 1A .
- the second section 104B of the upper boom portion 104 may extend over, and generally parallel to, the forks 16 and perpendicular to the first section 104A and the main body 106 of the base mount 102.
- the adapter 1150 comprises at least one coupling member that includes at least one coupling plate.
- the adapter 1150 comprises a first upper plate mount 1156, a first lower plate mount 1158, a second upper plate mount 1160, and a second lower plate mount 1162
- the at least one coupling member comprises a first coupling plate 1152 and a second coupling plate 1154.
- the first coupling plate 1152 is joined to the first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158, e.g., via welding.
- the first upper plate mount 1156 is coupled to the upper boom portion 1104, and the first lower plate mount 1158 is coupled to the base mount 1102, as described herein.
- the second coupling plate 1154 is similarly joined to the second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162, e.g., via welding.
- the second upper plate mount 1160 is coupled to the upper boom portion 1104, and the second lower plate mount 1162 is coupled to the base mount 1102, as described herein.
- two coupling plates 1152, 1154 are shown, it should be understood that the at least one coupling member may include a single coupling plate, e.g., one of coupling plates 1152 or 1154.
- the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102 comprises a plurality of apertures 1107 formed on front and back sides.
- the front side of the main body 1106 comprises four apertures 1107.
- the back side of the main body 1106 also comprises four apertures 1107, although only some of the apertures 1107 are visible.
- the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 each comprises a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 1158-1 (only the apertures 1158-1 formed in the first lower plate mount 1158 are visible in FIG. 14 ).
- the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 may be inserted into the base mount 1102 so that the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 are received in the main body 1106, and the apertures 1158-1 formed in the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 are aligned with the apertures 1107 formed in the main body 1106.
- Fasteners 1204 extend through the apertures 1107 formed in the front side of the main body 1106 and are received in the apertures 1158-1 formed in the first lower plate mount 1158.
- Fasteners 1204 similarly extend through the apertures 1107 formed in the back side of the main body 1106 and are received in the apertures (not visible) formed in the second lower plate mount 1162.
- the upper boom portion 1104 may be coupled to the adapter 1150.
- the upper boom portion 1104 is hollow and comprises a first section 1104A and a second section 1104B.
- the second section 1104B extends at an angle with respect to the first section 1104A.
- the second section 1104B extends substantially perpendicular, i.e., at an angle of about 90 degrees, +/- 5 degrees, with respect to the first section 1104A.
- the second section 1104B may extend at an angle of +/- 45 degrees from horizontal, e.g., parallel to a plane (not shown) defined by the operator's platform 32 and/or the forks 16.
- the upper boom portion 1104 may comprise a single section that extends generally vertically above the operator's platform 32.
- a length L 1 of the first section 1104A may be different from, e.g., greater than, a length L 2 of the second section 1104B.
- the lengths L 1 , L 2 of the first and second sections 1104A, 1104B may be substantially equal. As shown in FIG.
- the main body 1106 may have a square or rectangular cross section with a first dimension D 106-1 ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches and a second dimension D 106-2 ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches, and the upper boom portion 1104 may have a circular cross section with a diameter dimension ranging from 1.0 inch to 3.0 inches
- the main body 1106 and the upper boom portion 1104 may be made from any metal, such as a steel, stainless steel, aluminum, etc.
- the main body 1106 may have a wall thickness ranging from 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch, and the upper boom portion 1104 may have a wall thickness ranging from 1/10 inch to 1/4 inch.
- An overall height of the boom assembly 1100 i.e., the overall height of the boom assembly 1100 above the forks 16 when the boom assembly 1100 is installed, may range from 5.5 feet to 14 feet.
- the upper boom portion 1104 comprises a different cross-section, i.e., a generally circular cross-section, as compared to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102, and a connector 1164 provides a transition between the generally rectangular cross-section of the main body 1106 to the generally circular cross-section of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the base mount 1102 and the upper boom portion 1104 may comprise the same cross-sectional shape.
- the connector 1164 may be positioned between the adapter 1150 and the upper boom portion 1104, as shown in FIG. 15 .
- the connector 1164 comprises a lower element 1166 having a cross-sectional shape (i.e., generally rectangular) and dimensions that mirror the cross-sectional shape and dimensions of the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- the lower element 1166 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to a lower surface (not visible) of an adapter plate 1168, and the first section 1104A of the upper boom portion 1104 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to an upper surface 1168-1 of the adapter plate 1168 opposite the lower surface.
- Gussets 1174 may be coupled, e.g., via welding, to the first section 1104A of the upper boom portion 1104 and may be further coupled, e.g., via welding, to the upper surface 1168-1 of the adapter plate 1168. The gussets 1174 may help to attach the first section 1104A of the upper boom portion 1104 to the adapter plate 1168 and to stabilize the upper boom portion 1104.
- the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 comprises a plurality of apertures 1105 formed on front and back sides, and the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 each comprises a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 1156-1, 1160-1.
- the front side of the lower element 1166 comprises four apertures 1105.
- the back side of the lower element 1166 also comprises four apertures.
- the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 each comprise four apertures 1156-1, 1160-1 (only two of the apertures 1160-1 formed in the second upper plate mount 1160 are visible in FIG. 14 ).
- the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164.
- the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 may be placed over the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 and positioned so that the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 are received in the lower element 1166 and the apertures 1156-1, 1160-1 formed in the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 are aligned with the apertures 1105 formed in the lower element 1166.
- Fasteners 1206 extend through the apertures 1105 formed in the front side of the lower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 1156-1 formed in the first upper plate mount 1156. Although not visible in FIGS. 14 and 15 , fasteners 1206 similarly extend through apertures formed in the back side of the lower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 1160-1 formed in the second upper plate mount 1160.
- the first section 1104A of the upper boom portion 1104 extends generally vertically above the operator's platform 32 and is generally vertically aligned with the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102, e.g., aligned along a vertical axis v.
- the second section 1104B of the upper boom portion 1104 may extend over, and generally parallel to, the forks 16 and perpendicular to the first section 1104A and the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may extend generally vertically and may be generally parallel to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102. As shown in FIGS. 1B and 18 , a cover 1288 may optionally be placed over the adapter 1150 and may extend from the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102 to cover the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154.
- the cover 1288 may be formed from a flexible, polymeric material.
- the adapter 2150 comprises at least one coupling member that includes at least one bar.
- the at least one coupling member comprises a first coupling bar 2152 and a second coupling bar 2154 that are each coupled to an upper boom portion 1104 and a base mount 1102.
- two bars 2152, 2154 are shown, it should be understood that the at least one coupling member may include a single bar, e.g., one of bars 2152 or 2154.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be substantially similar to each other and may each comprise a respective upper section 2156, 2160 that is coupled to the upper boom portion 1104; a lower section 2158, 2162 that is coupled to the base mount 1102; and a middle section 2170, 2172 joining the upper and lower sections 2156, 2158 and 2160, 2162.
- the upper and lower sections 2156, 2158 of the first coupling bar 2152 each comprise a respective first dimension or width W 2156 , W 2158 and a second dimension or depth D 2156 , D 2158 , with the widths W 2156 , W 2158 being substantially equal to each other and the depths D 2156 , D 2158 being substantially equal to each other.
- the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152 comprises a width W 2170 and a depth D 2170 , in which one or both of the width W 2170 and the depth D 2170 of the middle section 2170 are reduced or decreased, as compared to the corresponding width W 2156 , W 2158 and/or depth D 2156 , D 2158 of the upper and lower sections 2156, 2158.
- a width W 2170 and a depth D 2170 in which one or both of the width W 2170 and the depth D 2170 of the middle section 2170 are reduced or decreased, as compared to the corresponding width W 2156 , W 2158 and/or depth D 2156 , D 2158 of the upper and lower sections 2156, 2158.
- the middle section 2170 comprises a pair of upper curved surfaces 2170A, a pair of lower curved surfaces 2170B, and a pair of substantially planar middle surfaces 2170C (only one of each of the upper and lower curved surfaces 2170A, 2170B and the substantially planar middle surface 2170C is labeled), in which the upper and lower curved surfaces 2170A, 2170B curve continuously inward toward the substantially planar middle surfaces 2170C.
- first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be formed from steel, have upper and lower sections 2156, 2158 each comprising a respective width W 2156 , W 2158 from 1 ⁇ 2 inch to 2.0 inches, and a respective depth D 2156 , D 2158 from 1/2 inch to 2.5 inches, middle sections 2170, 2172 each comprising a respective width W 2170 from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch and a respective depth D 2170 from 1/2 inch to 2.5 inches.
- the upper, lower, and middle sections 2160, 2162, 2172 of the second coupling bar 2154 likewise each comprise a respective width W 2160 , W 2162 , W 2172 and depth D 2160 , D 2162 , D 2172 , in which the widths W 2160 , W 2162 of the upper and lower sections 2160, 2162 are substantially equal to each other; the depths D 2160 , D 2162 of the upper and lower sections 2160, 2162 are substantially equal to each other; and one or both of the width W 2172 and the depth D 2172 of the middle section 2172 are reduced or decreased, as compared to the corresponding width W 2160 , W 2162 and/or depth D 2160 , D 2162 of the upper and lower sections 2160, 2162.
- the main body 1106 comprises a plurality of apertures 2107 formed in the sides thereof, as shown in FIG. 19 .
- a right side of the main body 1106 comprises two apertures 2107.
- a left side of the main body 1106 also comprises two apertures.
- the lower sections 2158, 2162 of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 2158-1, 2162-1 extending through the depth D 2158 , D 2162 of the respective lower sections 2158, 2162.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- the lower section 2158, 2162 of each of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be inserted into the base mount 1102 so that the lower sections 2158, 2162 are received in the main body 1106 and the apertures 2158-1, 2162-1 formed in the lower sections 2158, 2162 of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 are aligned with the apertures 2107 formed in the main body 1106, as shown in FIG. 19 .
- Fasteners 2104 extend through the apertures 2107 formed in the right side of the main body 1106 and are received in the apertures 2162-1 formed in the lower section 2162 of the second coupling bar 2154. Fasteners 2104 similarly extend through the apertures (not visible) formed in the left side of the main body 1106 and are received in the apertures 2158-1 formed in the lower section 2158 of the first coupling bar 2152. Washers (not labeled) may be positioned between the fasteners 2104 and the main body 1106. When the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 are installed in the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102, the upper sections 2156, 2160 and the middle sections 2170, 2172 extend above the main body 1106, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 .
- the upper boom portion 1104 may be coupled to the adapter 2150. As shown in FIGS. 1B and 20 , the upper boom portion 1104 may comprise a first section 1104A and a second section 1104B.
- a connector 2164 provides a transition between the generally rectangular cross-section of the main body 1106 to the generally circular cross-section of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the connector 1164 shown in FIG. 20 which may be substantially similar to the connector 1164 shown in FIG. 15 , may be positioned between the adapter 2150 and the upper boom portion 1104 and comprises a lower element 1166 having a cross-sectional shape (i.e., generally rectangular) and dimensions that mirror the cross-sectional shape and dimensions of the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- the lower element 1166 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to a lower surface (not visible) of an adapter plate 1168, and the first section 1104A of the upper boom portion 1104 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to an upper surface 1168-1 of the adapter plate 1168 opposite the lower surface.
- Gussets 1174 may be coupled, e.g., via welding, to the first section 1104A of the upper boom portion 1104 and may be further coupled, e.g., via welding, to the upper surface 1168-1 of the adapter plate 1168.
- the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 comprises a plurality of apertures 2105 formed in the sides thereof.
- a right side of the lower element 1166 comprises two apertures 2105.
- a left side of the lower element 1166 also comprises two apertures.
- the upper sections 2156, 2160 of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 2156-1, 2160-1 extending through the depth D 2156 , D 2160 (not labeled in FIG. 20 ; see FIG. 19 ) of the respective upper sections 2156, 2160.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164.
- the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 may be placed over the upper sections 2156, 2160 of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 and positioned so that the upper sections 2156, 2160 are received in the lower element 1166 and the apertures 2156-1, 2160-1 formed in the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 are aligned with the apertures 2105 formed in the lower element 1166.
- Fasteners 2206 extend through the apertures 2105 formed in the right side of the lower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 2160-1 formed in the upper section 2160 of the second coupling bar 2154. Fasteners 2206 similarly extend through apertures (not visible) formed in the left side of the lower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 2156-1 formed in the upper section 2156 of the first coupling bar 2152. Washers (not labeled) may be positioned between the fasteners 2206 and the lower element 1166.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may extend generally vertically and may be generally parallel to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- a cover 1288 may optionally be placed over the adapter 2150 and may extend from the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102 to cover the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154.
- the accessory 300 may be coupled to a distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 prior to, or after, coupling of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 to the adapter 150, 1150, 2150.
- the accessory 300 may be coupled to the distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 via any suitable attachment or attaching means (not shown), such as an adapter bracket 302 as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 .
- the accessory 300 may also be coupled to the distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the upper boom portion 104, 1104, e.g., via a threaded opening in the upper boom portion 104, 1104 that receives the accessory 300, etc.
- the accessory 300 may be wireless and may comprise a battery or other power source.
- wiring (not shown) may extend from the truck 10 through the boom assembly 100, 1100 to the accessory 300, e.g., to provide the accessory 300 with power and/or to send data to and receive data from the accessory 300.
- the accessory 300 is coupled to the upper boom portion 104, 1104 via an adapter bracket 302 (an outline of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is shown with dashed lines in FIG. 24 to illustrate internal components).
- the distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may comprise a receiver 320 that is configured to secure the adapter bracket 302 to the upper boom portion 104, 1104.
- the adapter bracket 302 comprises a flange 304 that is seated against the receiver 320 when the adapter bracket 302 is installed.
- An opening 306 in the flange 304 includes slots 308 through which fasteners 310 extend and are received in threaded apertures 321 formed in the receiver 320.
- the receiver 320 may comprise an opening 322, such that any wiring (not shown) may extend from the truck 10 through the boom assembly 100, 1100 and through the openings 322, 306 to the accessory 300.
- the accessory 300 may be coupled to the adapter bracket 302.
- the adapter bracket 302 comprises a compartment 312 that is defined by the flange 304, side walls 314, 316, and an end wall 318.
- One of the side walls 316 comprises an opening 317 through which a fastener 324 extends and is received in a threaded aperture 301 formed in a housing 326 of the accessory 300.
- a washer (not labeled) may be positioned between the fastener 324 and the side wall 316.
- a spacer 328 may be placed between the accessory 300 and an inner surface (not visible) of the side wall 316 to maintain a desired positioning of the accessory 300 within the compartment 312 and to prevent the accessory 300 from moving during operation.
- a length L 1 of the first section 104A, 1104A of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 and/or a length L 3 of the main body 106, 1106 of the base mount 102, 1102 may be adjusted or configured as desired to place the accessory 300 at a desired vertical distance D 1 above the forks 16 so that the accessory 300 may perform the desired functions without interfering with the operator or loading of items on the forks 16.
- a length L 2 of the second section 104B, 1104B of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may also be adjusted or configured as desired to obtain a desired horizontal placement or positioning of the accessory 300, i.e., a distance D 2 between the operator's backrest 34 or the load backrest 20 and the accessory 300.
- the location of the main body 106, 1106 and the upper boom portion 104, 1104 and/or the length L 2 of the second section 104B, 1104B may be configured to position the accessory 300: (i) generally centered over the forks 16, (ii) laterally along axis c so as to be near or directly over one of the forks 16, and/or (iii) outside of the load handling/fork area.
- the accessory 300 may be a camera.
- a pallet (not shown) may be placed on the forks 16, and the boom assembly 100, 1100 may position the camera above and over the forks 16 so that the camera may monitor and track items that are loaded onto the pallet.
- the accessory 300 may be an image projecting device, and the boom assembly 100, 1100 may position the image projecting device above and over the forks 16 so that the device may project an image at a desired location on the forks 16 or a pallet placed on the forks 16.
- the structure depicted in FIG. 39 resembles the boom assembly 1100 of FIG. 1B , reference numerals for analogous components of the boom assembly 100 of FIG. 1A are included.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 as described herein may extend generally vertically above the operator's platform 32 and generally horizontally over the forks 16, the boom assembly 100, 1100 is subjected to a variety of standard application forces during normal operation of the truck 10, including acceleration, braking, turning, and loading/unloading.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 may be subjected to additional forces, such as when the boom assembly 100, 1100 collides with an object (e.g., an overhead object, a falling object, etc. (not shown)) and/or the truck 10 collides with another object, such as another truck, a rack, etc. (not shown).
- an object e.g., an overhead object, a falling object, etc. (not shown)
- another object such as another truck, a rack, etc. (not shown).
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 may be subjected to forces directly incident on the upper boom portion 104, 1104 at any angle, such as exemplary external force F 1 or force F 2 .
- the external forces F 1 , F 2 may have force components coincident or parallel with a horizontal axis h, a vertical axis v, and/or an out-of-plane axis c, which axes are shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B .
- FIG. 40 resembles the boom assembly 1100 of FIG. 1B , reference numerals for analogous components of the boom assembly 100 of FIG. 1A are included.
- the external force F 1 may be caused by an object engaging/striking a first wall 104A-1, 1104A-1 of the first section 104A, 1104A of the upper boom portion 104, 1104, which first wall 104A-1, 1104A-1 faces away from the forks 16.
- the force F 1 may strike the first wall 104A-1, 1104A-1 at an angle, such that the force F 1 may have horizontal and vertical force components, as indicated by line h and line v, respectively.
- This force F 1 may cause the boom assembly 100, 1100 to bend in a bending direction 250 toward the forks 16 (also referred to herein as a first bending direction).
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may be subjected to a different external force, such as the force F 2 , caused by an object acting on a second wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 of the first section 104A, 1104A of the upper boom portion 104, 1104, which second wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 faces toward the forks 16, and/or acting on the adapter bracket 302, e.g., on the end wall 318 (see FIG. 26 ) of the adapter bracket 302 that extends substantially parallel to the second wall 104A-2, 1104A-2.
- a different external force such as the force F 2
- the force F 2 may comprise a normal force acting on the second wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 of the first section 104A, 1104A of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 or on the adapter bracket 302. This force F 2 may cause the boom assembly 100, 1100 to bend in a bending direction 252 toward the power unit 14 (also referred to herein as a second direction).
- these external forces F 1 or F 2 may generate stresses on the boom assembly 100, 1100, the operator's backrest 34, and other components of the truck 10 that may cause damage or failure in structural integrity, such as permanent deformation, cracking, shearing, or other type(s) of failure. As shown in FIGS.
- the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 is configured to maintain the boom assembly 100, 1100 in a normal (e.g., upright) operating position when the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is subjected to standard application forces during normal operation of the truck 10, i.e., when the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces causing one or more internal forces or stresses in the adapter 150, 1150, 2150, or at least one coupling member thereof, that are below the yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof.
- the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 is configured to maintain the boom assembly 100, 1100 in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield.
- the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 is further configured to yield or fail in a controlled manner, as shown in FIGS. 26-38 , when the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces causing one or more internal forces or stresses in the adapter 150, 1150, 2150, or at least one coupling member thereof, equal to, or in excess of, the yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof.
- the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 is configured to yield when the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 102, 1102, as described herein.
- the yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof may be designed so that the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 or coupling member yields or fails before one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 104, 1104 cause stresses in the operator's backrest 34 sufficient to result in damage or failure in the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34.
- the yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof may be designed so that the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 yields or fails before the one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 104, 1104 cause an element or component of the truck 10, i.e., the operator's backrest 34, to which the boom assembly 100 is coupled, to fail.
- the boom assembly 100 is considered to comprise the structure, e.g., first and second brackets 116A, 116B and the first and second flanges 108A, 108B, for coupling the base mount 102, 1102 to the truck 10.
- a moment M 2 of the force F 2 equals a magnitude of the force F 2 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h; see FIG. 1 ) times a length L M2 extending from where the force F 2 impacts or is applied to the second wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 to a location anywhere on the operator's backrest 34 (as the base mount 102, 1102 is coupled to the operator's backrest 34), such as where the first and second flanges 108A, 108B (not visible in FIG. 40 ; see FIG. 2 ) are coupled to the operator's backrest 34.
- the operator's backrest 34 will experience substantial bending stress from the moment M 2 .
- a geometry of, and material used for, the main body 106, 1106 of the base mount 102, 1102 and upper boom portion 104, 1104 are generally selected so that the main body 106, 1106 and the upper boom portion 104, 1104 have a high section modulus to withstand impact forces.
- a force such as force F 2
- stresses on the boom assembly 100, 1100 and the operator's backrest 34 resulting from the force F 2 and its corresponding moment M 2 are more likely to cause damage to the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34 than the boom assembly 100, 1100.
- a yield force or yield stress threshold for failure of the operator's backrest 34 will be determined, which may be used to determine a yield force threshold for the each of the first and second pins 180, 182 (see FIG. 7 ) and a yield stress threshold for each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 (see FIG. 16 ) or coupling bars 2152, 2154 (see FIG. 22 ).
- a force F H1 is applied at a height above the forks 16 and the operator's platform 32, which height is slightly above an operator height H 2 for a 95 th percentile adult male, see FIG. 39 .
- An internal moment M H1 from the force F H1 is developed within the operator's backrest 34, which equals a magnitude of the force F H1 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times a length L H1 extending from where the force F H1 impacts or is applied to the upper boom portion 104, 1104 to a given location on the operator's backrest 34, which given location on the operator's backrest 34 may extend from a lowermost point P L on the operator's backrest 34 to an uppermost point Pu on the operator's backrest 34, see FIG. 41 .
- Bending stress ⁇ may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which the operator's backrest 34 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel from which the operator's backrest 34 is formed. Yield strengths for such materials are well known.
- the section modulus Z can be calculated from the geometry of the operator's backrest 34 and may vary with height depending on backrest geometry, as section modulus Z may change along a height of the operator's backrest 34, i.e., a section modulus Z calculated for a backrest horizontal plane taken at one point along the height of the operator's backrest 34 may vary from a section modulus Z calculated for a backrest horizontal plane taken at a different point along the height of the operator's backrest 34.
- the section modulus Z may have one value when the moment arm defined by the length L H1L has an end point positioned at the lowermost point P L of the operator's backrest 34, as the cross-section of the geometry at the lowermost point P L of the operator's backrest 34 will be used when calculating the section modulus Z, and the section modulus Z may have another value when the moment arm defined by the length L H1U has an end point positioned at the uppermost point Pu of the operator's backrest 34, as the cross-section of the geometry at the uppermost point Pu of the operator's backrest 34 will be used when calculating the section modulus Z, which may differ from the cross-section taken at the lowermost point P L of the operator's backrest 34.
- each section modulus Z may be located at a different height along the operator's backrest 34 such that each calculated moment M M1i with a different, corresponding section modulus Z may have a different moment arm or length L H1i .
- the yield strength also defines a yield stress threshold for the operator's backrest 34. In other words, the force F H1 resulting in the moment M H1 will create stresses in the operator's backrest 34 equal to the yield stress threshold for the operator's backrest 34, resulting in structural integrity damage to the operator's backrest 34.
- the moment M H1i having the lowest value from all values of the moment M H1i calculated, which equals the smallest moment M H1i to cause damage to the operator's backrest 34, is designated as a minimum moment value M H1Min .
- a magnitude of a corresponding force F H1Min may be determined, which force F H1Min is likely to cause structural integrity damage to the operator's backrest 34.
- the force F H1Min may be determined by dividing the moment M H1Min by a length corresponding to moment M H1Min , e.g., the length corresponding to the section modulus Z corresponding to and from which moment M H1Min was determined. It is desirable to have each of the pins 180, 182 (see FIG.
- the force F H1Min may be multiplied by a safety factor, such as 0.5 or any other value desired to calculate a modified force F M .
- the force F H1Min is applied to a section of the upper boom portion 104 overlapping or overlying one of the upper engagement plates 154-1, as illustrated in FIGS. 41 and 42 , which location where the force F H1Min is applied is spaced a distance from the first pin 180 equal to length L M .
- a moment M FM of the modified force F M about the first pin 180 equals a magnitude of the modified force F M (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times the length L M extending from where the modified force F M impacts or is applied to the upper boom portion 104/upper engagement plate 154-1 to a location of the first pin 180.
- Application of the modified force F M causes an internal shear force F S to be applied by the hinge barrel 164 coupled to the upper support body 156 sufficient to shear the first pin 180.
- a moment M S of the shear force F S about the second pin 182 equals the magnitude of the shear force F S times a length L 180 extending from where the force F S impacts or is applied to the first pin 180 to a location of the second pin 182 about which the sheer force F S will rotate.
- shear strength V for various materials are well known.
- Various combinations of shear strength V and cross-sectional area A PIN for each of the first and second pins 180, 182 may be substituted into Equation (3).
- Shear force F S sufficient to shear the first or second pin 180, 182 is known from solving Equation (2) and is referred to herein as: (i) a shear force threshold for each of the first and second pins 180, 182; and (ii) the yield stress threshold for the adapter 150.
- a large cross-sectional area A PIN is selected for the first and second pins 180, 182 to account for degrading effects of repeated application-induced stresses or fatigue at the first and second pins 180, 182.
- the shear force threshold for each of the first and second pin 180, 182 separately or the yield stress threshold for the adapter 150 is designed so that the first and second pins 180, 182 fail prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34.
- the shear force threshold for each of the pins 180, 182 may be designed via experimentation using actual boom assemblies (e.g., by applying one or more external forces to actual boom assemblies to allow each of the pins 180, 182 to be designed so that each pin 180, 182 yields or fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34).
- the pins 180, 182 are designed so that when one or more external forces are applied to a boom assembly sufficient to cause internal stresses in each of the pins 180, 182 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of each pin 180, 182, the pin 180, 182 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest.
- the pins 180, 182 may also be designed via one or more suitable computer modelling techniques such that each of the pins 180, 182 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest.
- the upper boom portion 104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F 1 , at an angle to the first wall 104A-1 of the upper boom portion 104 and generally extending toward the forks 16.
- an external impact force i.e., exemplary force F 1
- exemplary force F 1 i.e., exemplary force F 1
- the adapter 150 yields or fails, and the upper element 152 of the adapter 150, along with the upper boom portion 104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward the forks 16 (referred to herein as a first shear state).
- the yield force threshold of the adapter 150 may equal the shear force threshold for each of the first and second pins 180, 182.
- the first pin 180 may be a shear pin that is comprised of one or more materials and may have a structure/geometry, such that the first pin 180 (also referred to herein as a first shear pin) has a shear force threshold or yield force threshold, as discussed above.
- the first pin 180 may resist rotation of the upper element 152 in the first bending direction 250, and prior to breaking, the first pin 180 may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of the upper boom portion 104.
- the upper boom portion 104 is subjected to the external force F 1 having a sufficient magnitude to cause one or more internal forces in the adapter 150 to equal or exceed the yield force threshold of the adapter 150, i.e., the external force F 1 on the upper boom portion 104 causes the hinge barrel 164 to create an internal shear force on the first pin 180 equal to or in excess of the shear force threshold or yield force threshold of the first pin 180, the first pin 180 is caused to break or be sheared apart and fail, as indicated by broken pin 180' in FIG. 27 .
- the first pin 180 may break at a location(s) positioned adjacent to the hinge barrel 164. Thus, the first pin 180 fails before one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34.
- the upper element 152 rotates relative to the lower element 158 about an axis A 1 of the second pin 182 in the first bending direction 250 toward the forks 16.
- the first gas spring 176 acts as a dampener and provides resistance to rotation of the upper element 152 in the first bending direction 250.
- the first arm 172 is held in place by (i) engagement between the linear section 172-1 and the first stop 186; and (ii) a remaining portion of the broken pin 180' in engagement with one of the hinge barrels 168 and the aperture of the first arm 172, causing the first gas spring 176 to be compressed between the first extension 156-1 and the first end 172-2 of the first arm 172.
- Fluid such as a gas comprising air
- a cylinder not labeled
- the first gas spring 176 resists the compression caused by a piston or ram moving into the cylinder, such that the first gas spring 176 absorbs at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of the upper boom portion 104.
- the first gas spring 176 helps to slow and eventually stop the motion of the upper boom portion 104 and helps to control deflection of the upper boom portion 104 when the boom assembly 100 enters the first shear state.
- the amount of resistance provided by the first gas spring 176 may be selected as desired depending upon the type, size, etc. of gas spring provided.
- the second extension 156-2 also rotates with the upper support body 156, and the second arm 174 and the second gas spring 178 rotate freely about the axis A 1 of the second pin 182, in which the second pin 182 remains intact.
- the linear section 174-1 of the second arm 174 disengages and moves away from the second stop 188.
- the adapter 150 is configured such that the upper boom portion 104 remains connected to the base mount 102 after the first pin 180 fails.
- the upper element 152, and the upper boom portion 104 coupled thereto remain connected or attached to the lower element 158 via the second gas spring 178, the second arm 174, and the second pin 182 in engagement with the respective hinge barrels 166, 170 of the upper and lower support bodies 156, 162, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to the truck 10, the base mount 102 and the upper boom portion 104, the accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects.
- the upper boom portion 104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F 2 , in a direction generally toward the power unit 14.
- an external impact force i.e., exemplary force F 2
- the adapter 150 yields or fails, causing the upper element 152 of the adapter 150, along with the upper boom portion 104 coupled thereto, to be displaced toward the power unit 14 (referred to herein as a second shear state).
- the second pin 182 may comprise a shear pin, and as described above with respect to the first pin 180 in FIGS. 27 and 28 , the second pin 182 (also referred to herein as a second shear pin) may have a shear force threshold or yield force threshold, see Equations (2) and (3), determined by the one or more materials comprising the second pin 182 and/or a structure/geometry of the second pin 182.
- the second pin 182 may resist rotation of the upper element 152 in the second bending direction 252, and prior to breaking, the second pin 182 may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of the upper boom portion 104.
- the upper boom portion 104 is subjected to the external force F 2 having a sufficient magnitude to cause one or more internal forces in the adapter 150 to equal or exceed the yield force threshold of the adapter 150, i.e., the external force F 2 acting on the upper boom portion 104 causes the hinge barrel 166 to create an internal shear force on the second pin 182 equal to or in excess of the shear force threshold or yield force threshold of the second pin 182, the second pin 182 is caused to break or be sheared apart and fail, as indicated by broken pin 182' in FIG.
- the second pin 182 may break at a location(s) positioned adjacent to the hinge barrel 170. Thus, the second pin 182 fails before one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34.
- the upper element 152 then rotates relative to the lower element 158 about an axis A 2 of the first pin 180 in the second bending direction 252 toward the power unit 14.
- the second gas spring 178 acts as a dampener and provides resistance to rotation of the upper element 152 in the second bending direction 252.
- the second arm 174 is held in place by (i) engagement between the linear section 174-1 and the second stop 188; and (ii) a remaining portion of the broken pin 182' in engagement with one of the hinge barrels 170 and the aperture of the second arm 174, causing the second gas spring 178 to be compressed between the second extension 156-2 and the first end 174-2 of the second arm 174.
- Fluid such as a gas comprising air
- a cylinder (not labeled) of the first gas spring 176 resists the compression caused by a piston or ram moving into the cylinder, such that the second gas spring 178 absorbs at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of the upper boom portion 104.
- the second gas spring 178 helps to slow and eventually stop the motion of the upper boom portion 104 and helps to control deflection of the upper boom portion 104 of the boom assembly 100 when the boom assembly 100 enters the second shear state.
- the amount of resistance provided by the second gas spring 178 may be selected as desired depending upon the type, size, etc. of gas spring provided.
- the first extension 156-1 also rotates with the upper support body 156, and the first arm 172 and the second gas spring 178 rotate freely about the axis A 2 of the first pin 180, in which the second pin 182 remains intact.
- the linear section 172-1 of the first arm 172 disengages and moves away from the first stop 186.
- the adapter 150 is configured such that the upper boom portion 104 remains connected to the base mount 102 after the second pin 182 fails.
- the upper element 152, and the upper boom portion 104 coupled thereto remain attached to the lower element 158 via the first gas spring 176, the first arm 172, and the first pin 180, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to the truck 10, the base mount 102 and upper boom portion 104, the accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects.
- the force F H1Min may be applied to a section of the upper boom portion 1104, specifically to a section of the connector 1164, which location where the force F H1Min is applied is spaced a distance from a top of an unsupported coupling plate section, i.e., a respective location 1152-1, 1154-1 at which the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 extend beyond the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160, which distance from where the force F H1Min is applied to the respective location 1152-1, 1154-1 is equal to length L M1 , as shown in FIG. 41 , 43 , and 45 .
- a moment M FM1 of the modified force F M1 about an axis A M1 at one of (or at a point midway between) the locations 1152-2, 1154-2, where the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 and upper end portions 1158A, 1162A of the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 meet equals a magnitude of the modified force F M1 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times the length L M1 plus a length D 1152 or D 1154 extending from where the modified force F M1 impacts or is applied to the upper boom portion 1104/connector 1164 to a location on one of (or at a point midway between) the locations 1152-2, 1154-2.
- M local F M 1 ⁇ D
- M global F M 1 ⁇ L M 1
- D is the length of an unsupported distance D 1152 of the first coupling plate 1152 between the first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158 or the length of an unsupported distance D 1154 of the second coupling plate 1154 between the second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162.
- Length D is selected so that the coupling plates 1152 and 1154 have sufficient length to bend without fracturing or cracking.
- L M1 is a lever arm distance from the impact force F M1 to one of (or a point midway between) the locations 1152-1, 1154-1, where the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 and lower end portions 1156A, 1160A of the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 meet.
- ⁇ axial couple F M 1 ⁇ L M 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ DF
- a plate ⁇ x ⁇ local F m 1 ⁇ D ⁇ 2 ⁇ Z
- ⁇ global DF ⁇ F m 1 ⁇ L m 1 2 ⁇ Z
- X is a distance between the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 in a direction parallel to the h axis. Distance X is selected so that the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 do not contact during bending.
- L M1 is a lever arm distance from the impact force F M1 to one of (or a point midway between) the locations 1152-1, 1154-1.
- D is the length of an unsupported distance D 1152 of the first coupling plate 1152 between the first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158 or the length of an unsupported distance D 1154 of the second coupling plate 1154 between the second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162.
- a plate is the cross-sectional area of each of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154, i.e., determined by multiplying a first dimension T 1152 times a second dimension W 1152 , see FIG. 44 , in which only the dimensions T 1152 and W 1152 are illustrated for the first coupling plate 1152.
- plate 1154 in the illustrated embodiment, has the same cross section and, hence, the same dimensions T 1152 and W 1152 .
- DF moment distribution factor having a value between 0 and 1 and, in the illustrated embodiment, equals 0.5 since both coupling plates 1152, 1154 are identical.
- Z a section modulus for each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154, which can be determined based on the geometry of each plate 1152, 1154.
- the total stresses ⁇ total occurring within each one of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 when the modified force F M1 impacts on the upper boom portion 1104/the connector 1164 may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel. Yield strengths for such materials are well known. When the total stresses ⁇ total occurring in each one of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 equals the yield strength ⁇ yield strength of the material from which the coupling plate 1152, 1154 is formed, each coupling plate 1152, 1154 will fail or yield, i.e., permanently deform or bend.
- the yield strength ⁇ yield strength of the material from which each coupling plate 1152, 1154 is formed is equal to a yield stress threshold for each plate 1152, 1154.
- Z T 1152 ⁇ A plate 6
- coupling plate 1154 in the illustrated embodiment, has the same cross section as coupling plate 1152 and, hence, the same dimensions T 1152 and W 1152 . Accordingly, Equation (7) may also be used to determine Z for the coupling plate 1154. As noted above, length D is selected so that the coupling plates 1152, 1154 bend and do not fracture and distance X is selected so that the coupling plates 1152, 1154 do not contact during bending. As also noted above, the cross-sectional area A plate of each of the plates 1152, 1154 may be determined by multiplying the first dimension T 1152 times the second dimension W 1152 .
- an overall stiffness of the coupling element i.e., the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 increases, i.e., an amount of force necessary to bend the coupling plates 1152, 1154 increases.
- various combinations of the first dimension T 1152 , the cross-sectional area A plate (T 1152 * W 1152 ) for each coupling plate 1152, 1154, and the distance X may be substituted into Equations (6) and (7) and appropriate values for the first and second dimensions T 1152 and W 1152 and, hence, the cross sectional area A plate and the distance X are selected.
- the cross sectional area A plate is selected to be sufficiently large to minimize deflection of the upper boom portion 1104 and maximize resiliency to prevent fatigue of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154.
- each coupling plate 1152, 1154 is designed so that the coupling plate 1152, 1154 fails when the modified force F M1 is applied to the upper boom portion 1104/the connector 1164 at the location illustrated in FIGS. 41 , 43 , and 45 , or a moment is generated by a force F applied anywhere along the upper boom portion 1104 and having a moment arm extending to any location on the backrest 34, in which the moment generated by that force F is equal to or greater than the moment M FM1 .
- both coupling plates 1152, 1154 will fail or yield prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34.
- Determining the modified force F M1 and the corresponding moment M FM1 may be found using finite element analysis methods so as to allow the first and second dimensions T 1152 and W 1152 and the cross sectional area A plate and the distance X to be calculated from Equations (4) and (5).
- the yield stress threshold for each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 may be designed via experimentation using actual boom assemblies (e.g., by applying one or more external forces to actual boom assemblies to allow each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 to be designed so that each coupling plate 1152, 1154 yields or fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34).
- the coupling plates 1152, 1154 are designed so that when one or more external forces are applied to a boom assembly sufficient to cause internal stresses in each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of each coupling plate 1152, 1154, the coupling plate 1152, 1154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest.
- the coupling plates 1152, 1154 may also be designed via one or more suitable computer modelling techniques such that each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest or any other element of the truck 10.
- the upper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F 1 , at an angle to the first wall 1104A-1 of the upper boom portion 1104 and generally extending toward the forks 16.
- exemplary force F 1 an external impact force
- first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 fail and begin to plastically deform, i.e., bend, in the first bending direction 250, as indicated by bent first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' in FIG. 32 .
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 bend about an axis (not shown) that is parallel to axis c (see FIG. 31 ).
- a yield stress threshold of the adapter 1150 may equal the yield stress threshold for each of first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154, i.e., the yield strength ⁇ yield strength of the material from which each coupling plate 1152, 1154 is formed. Failure and deformation of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 allows the connector 1164, along with the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, to rotate or be displaced in the first bending direction 250, i.e., toward the forks 16 (in FIG. 32 , the upper boom portion 1104 is not shown (see FIG. 31 ) and the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 is shown with dashed lines to illustrate the internal structure of the adapter 1150).
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may be formed from the same material, e.g., a metal such as steel, and may have the same structure/geometry, such that the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 each have the same yield stress threshold.
- the first and second dimensions T 1152 and W 1152 and the cross sectional area A plate of each coupling plate 1152, 1154, the distance X and the material from which each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 is formed, which material has a given yield strength ⁇ yield strength defining the yield stress threshold of each of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154, may be selected, such that the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 fail or yield before the one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 1104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 act as a moment limiter for the operator's backrest 34 thereby ensuring that the coupling plates 1152, 1154 fail prior to the backrest 34.
- each coupling plate 1152, 1154 may be formed from steel, have a first dimension T 1152 of from about 1/8 inch to about 3/8 inch, a second dimension W 1152 from about 2.0 inches to about 5.0 inches, a cross sectional area A plate from about 1 ⁇ 4 inch 2 to about 1.875 inch 2 , a distance X between the coupling plates 1152, 1154 from about 0.5 to about 2.0 inches, and a length D from about 3/8 inch to about 2.0 inches.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may plastically deform to allow controlled movement of the upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to the base mount 1102, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 .
- the second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162 provide a first stop that limits rotation of the connector 1164, and the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in the first bending direction 250.
- the connector 1164 is depicted in FIGS. 31 and 32 as having rotated by about 45 degrees from a normal operating position with respect to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- a lower surface of the second upper plate mount 1160 may comprise a chamfered edge 1161, and an upper surface of the second lower plate mount 1162 may comprise a corresponding chamfered edge 1163. If the connector 1164 continues rotating in the first bending direction 250 beyond about 45 degrees, the chamfered edge 1161 of the second upper plate mount 1160 engages the chamfered edge 1163 of the second lower plate mount 1162, with engagement between the chamfered edges 1161, 1163 acting as the first stop to halt rotation of the connector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may also be used with the base mount 1102 and upper boom portion 1104 described in detail with respect to FIGS. 36 and 38 , in which a portion of the base mount 1102 and the upper boom portion 1104 form first and second stops.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may resist rotation of the connector 1164 in the first bending direction 250 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the amount of resistance provided by the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may be selected based on the shape, geometry, and/or material of the plates 1152, 1154, as well as the configuration of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 with respect to each other and/or with respect to the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 (e.g., distances X, D 1152 , and D 1154 , as described above).
- the adapter 1150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F 1 , causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 resulting in plastic deformation of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154, the plastically deformed first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 further hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104. As shown in FIG.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' plastically deform/bend upon failure but typically do not break or fracture, such that the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' remain connected/attached to connector 1164 and the base mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to the truck 10, the base mount 1102 and the upper boom portion 1104, the accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects.
- both coupling plates 1152', 1154' will remain coupled to the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F 1 moves over or past the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., the adapter 1150 is fixedly coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 via the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 and the base mount 1102, as the coupling plates 1152', 1154' will yield or deflect before the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 and/or the coupling plates 1152', 1154' separate from one another or from the upper boom portion 1104 or the base mount 1102.
- the angle of deflection of the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' will stabilize at the final deformed angular position once the object imparting the impact force F 1 is no longer in contact with the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' have sufficient rigidity that the weight of the upper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' after the impact force has been removed.
- the plastically deformed first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which the plates 1152', 1154' are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., the upper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' do not further deform or move angularly relative to the base mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the upper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F 2 , in a direction generally toward the power unit 14.
- exemplary force F 2 an external impact force
- the adapter 1150 yields or fails, and the connector 1164, along with the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward the power unit 14 (referred to herein as a second failed state), as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 .
- first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 fail and begin to plastically deform, i.e., bend, in the second bending direction 252, as indicated by bent first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" in FIG. 34 .
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 bend about an axis (not shown) that is parallel to axis c (see FIG. 33 ).
- a yield stress threshold of the adapter 1150 may equal the yield stress threshold for each of first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154, i.e., the yield strength ⁇ yield strength of the material from which each coupling plate 1152, 1154 is formed. Failure and deformation of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 allows the connector 1164, along with the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, to rotate or be displaced in the second bending direction 252, i.e., toward the power unit 14 (in FIG. 34 , the upper boom portion 1104 is not shown (see FIG. 33 ), and the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 is shown with dashed lines to illustrate the internal structure of the adapter 1150).
- the material(s) and/or structure/geometry of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may be selected so that the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 have a yield stress threshold that allows the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 to begin failing before the one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 1104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34, such that the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 act as a moment limiter for the operator's backrest 34.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may permanently and plastically deform to allow controlled movement of the upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to the base mount 1102, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 .
- the first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158 provide a second stop that limits rotation of the connector 1164, and the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in the second bending direction 252.
- the connector 1164 in FIGS. 33 and 34 is depicted as having rotated by about 45 degrees from a normal operating position with respect to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- a lower surface of the first upper plate mount 1156 may comprise a chamfered edge 1157, and an upper surface of the first lower plate mount 1158 may comprise a corresponding chamfered edge 1159. If the connector 1164 continues rotating in the second bending direction 252 beyond about 45 degrees, the chamfered edge 1157 of the first upper plate mount 1156 engages the chamfered edge 1159 of the first lower plate mount 1158, with engagement between the chamfered edges 1157, 1159 acting as the second stop to halt rotation of the connector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may also be used with the base mount 1102 and upper boom portion 1104 described in detail with respect to FIGS. 36 and 38 , in which a portion of the base mount 1102 and the upper boom portion 1104 form first and second stops.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may resist rotation of the connector 1164 in the second bending direction 252 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the amount of resistance provided by the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 may be selected based on the shape, geometry, and/or material selected for coupling plates 1152, 1154 and the configuration of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 with respect to each other and/or with respect to the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162.
- the adapter 1150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F 2 , causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 resulting in plastic deformation of the coupling plates 1152, 1154, the plastically deformed first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 further hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104. As shown in FIG.
- the first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" plastically deform/bend upon failure but typically do not break or fracture, such that the first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" remain connected/attached to connector 1164 and the base mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to the truck 10, the base mount 1102 and the upper boom portion 1104, the accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects.
- both coupling plates 1152", 1154" will remain coupled to the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F 2 moves over or past the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., the adapter 1150 is fixedly coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 via the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 and the base mount 1102, as the coupling plates 1152", 1154" will yield or deflect before the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 and/or the coupling plates 1152", 1154" separate from one another or from the upper boom portion 1104 or the base mount 1102.
- the angle of deflection of the first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" will stabilize at the final deformation angle once the object imparting the impact force F 2 is no longer in contact with the upper boom portion 104, i.e., the first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" have sufficient rigidity that the weight of the upper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" after the impact force has been removed.
- the plastically deformed first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which the plates 1152", 1154" are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., the upper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" do not further deform or move angularly relative to the base mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first and second coupling plates 1152", 1154" have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the force F H1Min corresponding to the moment M H1i having the lowest value from all values of the moment M H1i calculated is applied to a section of the upper boom portion 1104, specifically to a section of the connector 1164, which location where the force F H1Min is applied is spaced a distance from an approximate center C 2152 , C 2154 of the respective middle section 2170, 2172 of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 equal to length L M1' , as shown in FIGS. 41 and 46 .
- a moment M FM1 of the modified force F M1 about an axis passing through the center C 2152 , C 2154 of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 equals a magnitude of the modified force F M1 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times the length L M1' extending from where the modified force F M1 impacts or is applied to the connector 1164 to the center C 2152 , C 2154 of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154.
- the total stresses ⁇ total occurring within each of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154, when the modified force F M1 is applied to the upper boom portion 1104/connector 1164 at the location illustrated in FIGS. 41 and 46 , may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel. Yield strengths for such materials are well known. When the total stresses ⁇ total occurring in each one of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 equals the yield strength ⁇ yield strength of the material from which the coupling bar 2152, 2154 is formed, each coupling bar 2152, 2154 will fail or yield, i.e., permanently deform or bend.
- the yield strength ⁇ yield strength of the material from which each coupling bar 2152, 2154 is formed is equal to a yield stress threshold for each coupling bar 2152, 2154, which also equals a yield stress threshold for the adapter 2150.
- Z Bar may be determined for a middle section 2170, 2172 of each of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 from the following Equation (9).
- Z Bar W ⁇ A bar 6
- the width W for the middle section 2170 for the first coupling bar 2152 equals width W 2170 and the width W for the middle section 2172 for the second coupling bar 2154 equals width W 2172 .
- the cross-sectional area A bar for the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152 may be determined by multiplying the width W 2170 of the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152 by the depth D 2170 of the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152.
- the cross-sectional area A bar of the middle section 2172 for the second coupling bar 2154 may be determined by multiplying the width W 2172 of the middle section 2172 of the second coupling bar 2152 by the depth D 2172 of the middle section 2172 of the second coupling bar 2154.
- each coupling bar 2152, 2154 may be substituted into Equations (8) and (9) and appropriate values for the width W and the cross sectional area A bar are selected.
- the cross sectional area A bar is selected to be sufficiently large to minimize deflection of the upper portion and maximize resiliency to prevent fatigue of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154.
- each coupling bar 2152, 2154 is designed so that the coupling bar 2152, 2154 fails when the modified force F M1 is applied to the upper boom portion 1104/the connector 1164 at the location illustrated in FIGS.
- both coupling bars 2152, 2154 will fail or yield prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34.
- Determining the modified force F M1 and the corresponding moment M FM1 may be found using finite element analysis methods so as to allow the width W and the cross sectional area A plate for each coupling bar 2152, 2154 to be calculated from Equations (8) and (9).
- the shear force threshold for each of the pins 180, 182 and the yield stress threshold for each of the coupling plates 1152, 1154 or the bars 2152, 2154 may be designed via experimentation using actual boom assemblies (e.g., by applying one or more external forces to actual boom assemblies to allow each of the pins 180, 182, the coupling plates 1152, 1154, and the bars 2152, 2154 to be designed so that each pin 180, 182, coupling plate 1152, 1154, and bar 2152, 2154 yields or fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34).
- the pins 180, 182, the coupling plates 1152, 1154, and the bars 2152, 2154 are designed so that when one or more external forces are applied to a boom assembly sufficient to cause internal stresses in each of the pins 180, 182, the coupling plates 1152, 1154, and the bars 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of each pin 180, 182, coupling plate 1152, 1154, and bar 2152, 2154, pin 180, 182, coupling plate 1152, 1154, and bar 2152, 2154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest.
- the pins 180, 182, the coupling plates 1152, 1154, and the bars 2152, 2154 may also be designed via one or more suitable computer modelling techniques such that each of the pins 180, 182, the coupling plates 1152, 1154, and the bars 2152, 2154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34.
- the upper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F 1 , at an angle to the first wall 1104A-1 of the upper boom portion 1104 and generally extending toward the forks 16.
- exemplary force F 1 an external impact force
- application of the external force F 1 to the upper boom portion 1104 may cause displacement of the connector 1164 in the first bending direction 250, and when the magnitude of the external force F 1 is sufficient to cause one or more internal stresses in each of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 to equal or exceed the yield stress threshold of each of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 (i.e., the external force F 1 on the upper boom portion 1104 causes the connector 1164 to create stresses in the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of each of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154), the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 fail and begin to plastically deform, i.e., bend, in the first bending direction 250, as indicated by bent first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' in FIG.
- a yield stress threshold of the adapter 2150 may equal the yield stress threshold for each of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154. Failure and deformation of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 allows the connector 1164, along with the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, to rotate or be displaced in the first bending direction 250, i.e., toward the forks 16.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be formed from the same material, e.g., a metal such as steel, and may have the same structure/geometry, such that the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 each have the same yield stress threshold.
- the respective width W 2170 , W 2172 and depth D 2170 , D 2172 of the middle section 2170, 2172 of each of the first coupling bar 2152 and the second coupling bar 2154, the cross sectional area A bar of the middle section 2170, 2172 of each coupling bar 2152, 2154, and the material from which each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 is formed, which material has a given yield strength ⁇ yield strength defining the yield stress threshold of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be selected, such that the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 fail or yield before the one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may bend at a location adjacent to the respective center C 2152 , C 2154 .
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 plastically deform to allow controlled movement of the upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to the base mount 1102, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36 .
- a first portion of an upper end surface of the base mount 1102, i.e., a first portion 2169-1 of an upper end surface 2169 of the base mount 1102, and a first portion of a lower end surface of the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., a first portion 2167-1 of a lower end surface 2167 of the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164, provide a first stop that limits rotation of the connector 1164, and the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in the first bending direction 250.
- the connector 1164 is depicted in FIGS.
- the first portion 2167-1 of the lower end surface 2167 of the lower element 1166 may comprise a sloped edge
- the first portion 2169-1 of the upper end surface 2169 of the base mount 1102 may comprise a corresponding sloped edge. If the connector 1164 continues rotating in the first bending direction 250 beyond about 45 degrees, the sloped edge of the first portion 2167-1 of the lower end surface 2167 engages the sloped edge of the first portion 2169-1 of the upper end surface 2169, with engagement between the sloped edges acting as the first stop to halt rotation of the connector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may resist rotation of the connector 1164 in the first bending direction 250 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the amount of resistance provided by the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be selected based on the material and/or geometry.
- the adapter 2150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F 1 , causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 to equal or exceed the yield stress threshold of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154, the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104. As shown in FIG.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' plastically deform/bend upon failure and are designed not to break or fracture when typical or expected one or more external forces, i.e., force F 1 strike the upper boom portion 1104 such that the first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' remain connected/attached to connector 1164 and the base mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to the truck 10, the base mount 1102 and the upper boom portion 1104, the accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects.
- both coupling bars 2152', 2154' will remain coupled to the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F 1 moves over or past the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., the adapter 2150 is fixedly coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 via the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 and the base mount 1102, as the coupling bars 2152', 2154' will yield or deflect before the coupling bars 2152', 2154' separate from the upper boom portion 1104 and/or the base mount 1102.
- the angle of deflection of the first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' will stabilize at the final angular position once the object imparting the impact force F 1 is no longer in contact with the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., the first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' have sufficient rigidity that the weight of the upper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' after the impact force has been removed.
- the plastically deformed first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which the coupling bars 2152', 2154' are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., the upper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' do not further deform or move angularly relative to the base mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the upper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F 2 , in a direction generally toward the power unit 14.
- exemplary force F 2 an external impact force
- the adapter 2150 yields or fails and enters the second failed state, and the connector 1164, along with the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward the power unit 14, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 .
- the material(s) and/or structure/geometry of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be selected so that the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 have a yield stress threshold that allows the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 to begin failing before the one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 1104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator's backrest 34.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may bend at a location adjacent to the respective center C 2152 , C 2154 .
- the yield stress threshold of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be designed so that the adapter 2150 yields or fails before one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion 1104 cause an element or component of the truck 10, i.e., the operator's backrest 34, to which the boom assembly 1100 is coupled to fail.
- the boom assembly 1100 is considered to comprise the structure, i.e., the first and second brackets 116A, 116B and the first and second flanges 108A, 108B, for coupling the base mount 1102 to the truck 10.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 plastically deform to allow controlled movement of the upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to the base mount 1102, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 .
- a second portion of the upper end surface of the base mount 1102, i.e., a second portion 2169-2 of the upper end surface 2169 of the base mount 1102, and a second portion of the lower end surface of the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., a second portion 2167-2 of the lower end surface 2167 of the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164, provide a second stop that limits rotation of the connector 1164, and the upper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in the second bending direction 252.
- the connector 1164 is depicted in FIGS.
- the second portion 2167-2 of the lower surface 2167 of the lower element 1166 may comprise a sloped edge
- the second portion 2169-2 of the upper end surface 2169 of the base mount 1102 may comprise a corresponding sloped edge. If the connector 1164 continues rotating in the second bending direction 252 beyond about 45 degrees, the sloped edge of the second portion 2167-2 of the lower surface 2167 engages the sloped edge of the second portion 2169-2 of the upper end surface 2169, with engagement between the sloped edges acting as the second stop to halt rotation of the connector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may resist rotation of the connector 1164 in the second bending direction 252 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the amount of resistance provided by the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be selected based on the material and/or geometry.
- the adapter 2150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F 2 , causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154, the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104. As shown in FIG.
- the first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154" plastically deform/bend upon failure but do not break or fracture, such that the first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154" remain connected/attached to connector 1164 and the base mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to the truck 10, the base mount 1102 and the upper boom portion 1104, the accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects.
- both coupling bars 2152", 2154” will remain coupled to the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F 2 moves over or past the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., the adapter 2150 is fixedly coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 via the connector 1164 and the base mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to the upper boom portion 1104 and the base mount 1102, as the coupling bars 2152", 2154" will yield or deflect before the coupling bars 2152", 2154” separate from the upper boom portion 1104 and/or the base mount 1102.
- first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154 will stabilize at the final deformed angular position once the object imparting the impact force F 2 is no longer in contact with the upper boom portion 1104, i.e., the first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154" have sufficient rigidity that the weight of the upper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154" after the impact force has been removed.
- the plastically deformed first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154" hold the upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which the coupling bars 2152", 2154" are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., the upper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154" do not further deform or move angularly relative to the base mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first and second coupling bars 2152", 2154" have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the length L 3 of the main body 106, 1106 of the base mount 102, 1102 may be adjusted or configured to place or locate the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 at a desired height H 1 above the forks 16 and the operator's platform 32.
- the height H 1 may be based in part on the operator height H 2 for a 95 th percentile adult male.
- the height H 1 may be greater than the operator height H 2 to ensure that the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 is located high enough above the operator that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 does not contact the operator upon failure of the adapter 150, 1150, 2150.
- the operator height H 2 may be 75 inches, and the height H 1 may be 84 inches.
- Positioning the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 at the height H 1 may also help to prevent damage to the truck 10, the boom assembly 100, 1100, the accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel and objects by ensuring that when the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 enters the first or second failed state, the upper boom portion 104, 1104 remains clear of the rest of the truck 10, including, for example, the antenna 66, the forks 16, and/or a load positioned on the forks 16, and remains clear of adjacent objects and personnel.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may deflect relative to the base mount 102, 1102, i.e., relative to the vertical axis v, in the first bending direction 250 toward the forks 16 by an angle ⁇ 1 , in which the angle ⁇ 1 is greater than 0 degrees and up to about 90 degrees.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may deflect relative to the base mount 102, 1102, i.e., relative to the vertical axis v, in the second bending direction 252 toward the power unit 14 by an angle ⁇ 2 , in which the angle ⁇ 2 is greater than 0 degree and up to about 90 degrees.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is illustrated as being deflected at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the base mount 102, 1102.
- the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 and the components thereof may be modular or interchangeable, such that upon failure, the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 may be removed and replaced and the boom assembly 100, 1100 may be reassembled.
- the broken pin 180' may be removed from the adapter 150 and replaced with a new pin.
- the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 and the bent first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' of the adapter 1150 or the bent first and second coupling bars 2152', 2154' of the adapter 2150 may be removed and replaced.
- the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 yields to impact forces applied to the boom assembly 100, 1100
- the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 as described herein may help to prevent damage to the base mount 102, 1102, the upper boom portion 104, 1104, and/or the accessory 300, thereby reducing the cost of replacement, preventing or minimizing the need to repair the truck 10, and reducing the amount of down time before the truck 10 can resume normal operations.
- the truck 10 may include a processing device 400 that is implemented as a special purpose, particular computer that mounts to or is otherwise integrated with the truck 10.
- the processing device 400 comprises the necessary circuitry to implement wireless communication, data and information processing, and wired (and optionally wireless) communication to components of the truck 10.
- the processing device 400 includes a transceiver 402 for wireless communication. Although a single transceiver 402 is illustrated for convenience, in practice, one or more wireless communication technologies may be provided.
- the transceiver 402 may communicate with a remote server (not shown) and may also optionally support other wireless communication, such as cellular, Bluetooth, infrared (IR) or any other technology or combination of technologies. For instance, using a cellular to IP bridge the transceiver 402 can use a cellular signal to communicate directly with the remote server.
- a remote server not shown
- IR infrared
- the processing device 400 also comprises a control module 404 having a processor coupled to memory for implementing computer instructions, including computer-implemented processes, or aspects thereof, as set out and described more fully herein.
- the control module 404 communicates with the components set forth in FIG. 47A , making the processing device 400 a particular machine different from a general-purpose computer.
- the control module 404 may utilize the transceiver 402 to exchange information with the remote server for controlling operation of the truck 10, for remotely storing information extracted from the truck 10, etc.
- the processing device 400 further includes power enabling circuitry 406 controlled by the control module 404 to selectively enable or disable the truck 10 (or alternatively, to selectively enable or disable specific control modules or vehicle functions such as hydraulic, traction, etc.).
- the control module 404 can control the vehicle power enabling circuitry 406 to provide power to the truck 10, select components of the truck 10, select vehicle functions, etc. via power line 408, e.g., based upon operator login, detected geo-features, etc.
- the processing device 400 includes a monitoring input output (I/O) module 410 to communicate via wired or wireless connection to peripheral devices attached to or otherwise mounted on the truck 10, such as sensors, meters, encoders, switches, etc. (collectively represented by reference numeral 412).
- the module 410 may also be connected to other devices, e.g., third party devices 414 such as RFID scanners, displays, meters or other devices. This allows the control module 404 to obtain and process information monitored on the truck 10.
- the processing device 400 is coupled to and/or communicates with other vehicle system components via a suitable vehicle network bus 416.
- vehicle network bus 416 is any wired or wireless network, bus or other communications capability that allows electronic components of the truck 10 to communicate with each other.
- vehicle network bus 416 may comprise a controller area network (CAN) bus, Local Interconnect Network (LIN), time-triggered data-bus protocol (TTP) or other suitable communication technology.
- CAN controller area network
- LIN Local Interconnect Network
- TTP time-triggered data-bus protocol
- Utilization of the vehicle network bus 416 enables seamless integration of the control module 404 and other components of the processing device 400 into native electronics of the truck 10.
- the control module 404 of the processing device 400 connects with, understands and is capable of communication with native vehicle electronic components, such as traction controllers, hydraulic controllers, modules, devices, bus enabled sensors, displays, lights, light bars, sound generating devices, headsets, microphones, haptic devices, etc. (collectively referred to by reference 418).
- FIG. 47B illustrates various operational modules of the truck 10 (see FIGS. 1A and 1B ).
- the modules illustrated in FIG. 47B may comprise software code stored in memory that may be controlled, read and manipulated by, for example, the control module 404 of FIG. 47A .
- the truck 10 may comprise an integrity monitoring system (IMS) 420 that monitors a state of the boom assembly 100, 1100 (see FIGS. 1A and 1B ) to determine when the upper boom portion 104, 1104 has deflected and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- IMS integrity monitoring system
- the IMS 420 may include a main module 422 with a steer control module 424, a display module 426, a traction control module 428, and a lift control module 430 that are coupled to and communicate via a network bus 432.
- a network bus 432 may be coupled to and communicate via a network bus 432.
- the IMS 420 is depicted as including modules 424, 426, 428, 430, it may be understood that the IMS 420 may include fewer modules or additional modules (not shown). Alternatively, the IMS 420 may be implemented as a separate module (not shown).
- the steer control module 424 is coupled to and communicates with a steer motor 434 that controls a position of the steerable drive wheel 22 (see FIG. 39 ).
- the traction control module 428 is coupled to and communicates with a brake 436, a main contactor 438, and a traction motor 440 to control speed and directions of movement of the truck 10.
- the display module 426 is coupled to and communicates with a user interface 442 to display information to an operator of the truck 10.
- the lift control module 430 is coupled to and communicates with a lift motor 444 to control lifting and lowering of the load handling assembly 12 (see FIGS. 1A and 1B ).
- a key switch 446 is coupled to the main module 422 and allows the truck 10 to be turned off and on.
- the IMS 420 comprises one or more sensors 420A-420E.
- FIG. 48 a schematic block diagram illustrates an exemplary computer system 500 for implementing the various processes described herein, e.g., implementing any of the modules 424, 426, 428, 430 of FIG. 47B .
- the exemplary computer system 500 comprises one or more (hardware) electronic microprocessors 510 and corresponding (hardware) memory 520 (e.g., random access memory and/or read only memory) that are connected to a system bus 530.
- the one or more microprocessors 510 may include a single processor, a symmetric multiprocessor system, or other configuration including a plurality of processors connected to the system bus 530.
- the local bus 550 may be used to interface peripherals with the one or more microprocessors 510, such as storage 560 (e.g., hard disk drives)); removable media storage device(s) 570 (e.g., flash drives, DVD-ROM drives, CD-ROM drives, floppy drives, etc.); I/O devices 580 (e.g., the user interface 442 of FIG. 47B , etc.); and one or more network adapters 590.
- the network adapters 590 where provided, allow the microprocessor 510 to communicate across one or more of the vehicle network systems (e.g., bus 432 of FIG.
- example adapters 590 may comprise Bluetooth ® , Ethernet, CAN bus, RS422, LIN Bus, WiFi, cellular, etc.
- This list of peripherals is presented by way of illustration, and is not intended to be limiting. Other peripheral devices may be suitably integrated into the computer system 500.
- the memory 520, storage 560, removable media insertable into the removable media storage 570, or combinations thereof may be used to implement the methods, configurations, interfaces and other aspects set out and described herein.
- the microprocessor(s) 510 control operation of the exemplary computer system 500. Moreover, one or more of the microprocessor(s) 510 execute computer readable code (e.g., stored in the memory 520, storage 560, removable media insertable into the removable media storage 570, or combinations thereof - collectively or individually, computer-program products) that instructs the microprocessor(s) 510 to implement the methods and processes herein.
- the computer readable code may be stored for instance, in the memory 520, storage 560, removable media storage device(s) 570, or other suitable tangible storage medium accessible by the microprocessor(s) 510.
- the memory 520 may also function as a working memory, e.g., to store data, an operating system, etc.
- a "controller,” as used in the claims may include the microprocessor(s) 510 or the system 500.
- the methods and processes herein may be implemented as a machine-executable method executed on a computer system, e.g., one or more general computing devices, a particular computing device such as the processing device 400 of FIG. 47A , or combinations thereof.
- a computer system e.g., one or more general computing devices, a particular computing device such as the processing device 400 of FIG. 47A , or combinations thereof.
- the exemplary computer system or components thereof can implement processes and/or computer-implemented processes stored on one or more computer-readable storage devices as set out in greater detail herein.
- Other computer configurations may also implement the processes and/or computer-implemented processes stored on one or more computer-readable storage devices as set out in greater detail herein.
- Computer-program code for carrying out operations for aspects of the present disclosure may be written in any combination of one or more programming languages.
- the program code may execute entirely on the computer system 500 or partly on the computer system 500. In the latter scenario, a remote computer may be connected to the computer system 500 through any type of network
- any combination of computer-readable medium may be utilized.
- the computer-readable medium may be a computer readable signal medium, a computer-readable storage medium, or a combination thereof.
- a computer-readable storage medium may be implemented in practice as one or more distinct mediums.
- a computer-readable signal medium is a transitory propagating signal per se.
- a computer-readable signal medium may include computer readable program code embodied therein, for example, as a propagated data signal in baseband or as part of a carrier wave. More specifically, a computer-readable signal medium does not encompass a computer-readable storage medium.
- a computer-readable storage medium is a tangible device/hardware that can retain and store a program (instructions) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, e.g., a computer or other processing device set out more fully herein.
- a computer-readable storage medium does not encompass a computer-readable signal medium.
- a computer readable storage medium, as used herein, is not to be construed as being transitory signals per se, such as radio waves or other freely propagating electromagnetic waves through a transmission media.
- a computer-readable storage medium includes the following: a hard disk, a random-access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), Flash memory, a portable computer storage device, an optical storage device such as a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or digital video disk (DVD), or any suitable combination of the foregoing.
- a computer-readable storage medium includes computer-readable hardware such as a computer-readable storage device, e.g., memory.
- a computer-readable storage device and computer-readable hardware are physical, tangible implementations that are non-transitory.
- non-transitory it is meant that, unlike a transitory propagating signal per se, which will naturally cease to exist, the contents of the computer-readable storage device or computer-readable hardware that define the claimed subject matter persists until acted upon by an external action.
- program code loaded into random access memory (RAM) is deemed non-transitory in that the content will persist until acted upon, e.g., by removing power, by overwriting, deleting, modifying, etc.
- hardware comprises physical element(s) or component(s) of a corresponding computer system, hardware does not encompass software, per se.
- the sensors 420A-420E of the IMS 420 may be associated with the boom assembly 100, 1100 and/or the truck 10 and may be placed at one or more locations.
- the illustrated locations of the sensors 420A-420E are by way of example only, and it may be understood that the sensors 420A-420E may be placed at different locations.
- the truck 10 may comprise one or more sensors (not shown) that are located within the compartment 44.
- one or more of the sensors 420A-420E may be co-located at a single location, e.g., within a single sensor device.
- the IMS 420 may also comprise a greater or smaller number of sensors 420A-420E than is depicted in FIGS. 1A and 1B .
- the sensors 420A-420E are each configured to sense one or more parameters, e.g., velocity, acceleration, position, strain, and orientation related to the upper boom portion 104 to detect or indicate when or that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 has deflected and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102. As described herein, each of the sensors 420A-420E are further configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing a corresponding parameter, which signals are transmitted to the IMS 420 for processing.
- one or more parameters e.g., velocity, acceleration, position, strain, and orientation related to the upper boom portion 104 to detect or indicate when or that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 has deflected and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- each of the sensors 420A-420E are further configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing a corresponding parameter, which signals are transmitted to the IMS 420 for processing.
- One or more of the sensors 420A-420E may detect an angular velocity of the upper boom portion 104, 1104, in which the angular velocity exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 experiences vibration and other minor movements that may affect the angular velocity measurement.
- these angular velocity values may be filtered out, e.g., via a low pass filter, so that only values exceeding the predetermined threshold cause the IMS 420 to take action. That is, when the sensed angular velocity exceeds the predetermined threshold, the processor determines that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 has deflected or yielded relative to the base mount 102, 1102. With reference to FIG.
- the one or more sensors 420A-420E may comprise a gyroscope 405 that is associated with the upper boom portion 1104, e.g., attached to the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 or attached to any other location along the length of the upper boom portion 1104, and may measure the angular motion, i.e., angular velocity, of the upper boom portion 104, 1104.
- the gyroscope 405 may be a separate sensor device, and in other examples, the gyroscope 405 may be part of a single sensor device that comprises another sensor 420A-420E, e.g., an accelerometer 403 as described herein. While the example shown in FIG. 49 includes the adapter 2150 comprising coupling bars 2152, 2154, the gyroscope 405 may also be used with the boom assembly 100 and the adapters 150, 1150 as described herein.
- One or more of the sensors 420A-420E may comprise one or more strain gauges (not shown) that senses a strain level in the adapter 1150, 2150.
- the strain gauge may sense a strain level in one or more coupling members, in which the strain level exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 1150, 2150 to yield, such that the upper boom portion 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 1102 and is no longer aligned with the base mount 1102.
- the strain gauge may likewise be positioned directly on one or both of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 or one or both of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154 so as to sense the strain level in one or both of the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 or one or both of the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 experiences vibration and other minor movements that may cause the coupling plates 1152, 1154, or the coupling bars 2152, 2154 to experience strain.
- These strain levels are relatively low and may be filtered out, e.g., via a low pass filter, so that only values exceeding the predetermined threshold cause the IMS 420 to take action.
- One or more of the sensors 420A-420E may detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 relative to a predetermined reference, in which the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 no longer being aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- one or more of the sensors 420A-420E may comprise an imaging device, such as a camera.
- the imaging device may be the accessory 300 and/or may include one or more separate imaging devices associated with the upper boom portion 104, 1104, e.g., at the location indicated by sensor 420A in FIGS. 1A and 1B , such that the imaging device is positioned at a predetermined height above the forks 16.
- a field of view of the imaging device or a portion thereof may define a bounding box extending in a direction parallel to the c and h axes that includes at least a portion of the forks 16 (see FIGS. 1A and 1B ).
- the bounding box includes one or more targets, e.g., one or more landmarks, flags, or markers, associated with the forks 16 or another component of the truck 10, e.g., the load backrest 20 and/or the operator's backrest 34.
- the one or more targets each have a predefined location in the bounding box.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 experiences vibration and other minor movements that may affect the location of the one or more targets in the bounding box.
- a reference image may be generated that includes an average of the location(s) of the one or more targets across several images obtained over a time period, which serves as the predetermined reference and establishes a baseline to account for noise and jitter that occur during normal operation of the truck 10.
- a location of the one or more targets in a current image may be compared to the location of the one or more targets in the reference image, and when a change between the two locations exceeds a predetermined threshold, this change is indicative of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 moves to a deformed or deflected position relative to the base mount 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- each target may be assigned a weight that is used in determining whether the change exceeds the predetermined threshold, e.g., to account for the presence of a load on the forks 16 that may obstruct one or more of the targets.
- the one or more sensors 420A-420E that detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion 1104 relative to a predetermined reference may include one or more limit switches 407.
- the limit switch 407 comprises a main switch body 407-1 and a lever 407-2.
- the main switch body 407-1 is coupled to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102 via a bracket (not labeled) or other suitable attachment means, and the lever 407-2 is positioned adjacent to the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164.
- the lever 407-2 is in an upright position as shown in FIG. 50 , which upright position may be used as the predetermined reference.
- the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164 contacts, and causes movement of, the lever 407-2 toward a deflected position.
- the current position of the lever 407-2 is compared to the position of the lever 407-2 during normal operation of the truck 10, and when a difference between the positions exceeds a predetermined threshold, this difference is indicative of the upper boom portion 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 2150 to yield and the coupling bars 2152', 2154' to plastically deform, such that the upper boom portion 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 1102 and is no longer aligned with the base mount 1102.
- the predetermined threshold may be set to a distance corresponding to a deflection of the upper boom portion 1104 relative to the base mount 1102 of 45 degrees, such that detection of a distance exceeding this value is indicative of the upper boom portion 1104 having deflected such that the upper boom portion 1104 is no longer aligned with the base mount 1102.
- the limit switch 407 may be configured such that movement of the lever 407-2 from the upright position shown in FIG. 50 to the deflected position shown in FIG. 51 causes the limit switch 407 to move from a closed position generating, for example, a high signal, to an open position generating, for example, a low signal.
- a second limit switch may be positioned on an opposing side of the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102 to sense deflection of the upper boom portion 1104 in a direction opposite to the direction illustrated in FIG. 51 . While the example shown in FIG. 51 includes the adapter 2150 with coupling bars 2152', 2154', the limit switch 407 may also be used with the boom assembly 100 and the adapters 150, 1150 as described herein.
- the one or more sensors 420A-420E that detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion 1104 relative to a predetermined reference may include a proximity sensor.
- the proximity sensor comprises an optical sensor 409 that is positioned adjacent to the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164.
- the optical sensor 409 may be coupled to the main body 1106 of the base mount 1102.
- the optical sensor 409 may comprise an emitter 409-1 that transmits a beam of light (visible or invisible) toward the lower element 1166.
- the lower element 1166 is located within a path of the light emitted by the emitter 409-1, such that light is reflected back toward the optical sensor 409.
- the optical sensor 409 may also include an internal receiver (not labeled) that receives the reflected light to indicate a presence of the lower element 1166.
- a separate receiver (not shown) may be positioned opposite the emitter 409-1 such as on the lower element 1166, and when the lower element 1166 is in the normal operating position, the beam of light from the emitter 409-1 is sensed by the receiver, such that the separate receiver receives the output from the emitter 409-1 and the presence of the lower element 1166 is indicated.
- the amount of light received may be used as the predetermined reference.
- the upper boom portion 1104 deflects relative to the base mount 1102 as shown in FIG. 53 , the lower element 1166 is no longer located in the path of the light, such that light is no longer reflected back to the internal receiver in the optical sensor 409 and/or light is no longer received by the separate receiver.
- the proximity sensor may include any type of suitable sensor, including an inductive proximity sensor, a capacitive proximity sensor, a magnetic proximity sensor (e.g., a Hall effect sensor), etc.
- the one or more sensors 420A-420E that detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 relative to a predetermined reference may include an inclination sensor (not shown) that measures an amount of tilt or inclination of the upper boom portion 104, 1104.
- the inclination sensor may include at least one first inclination sensor located on the upper boom portion 104, 1104 (e.g., one or more of sensors 420A-420C), in which case the inclination of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may be measured with respect to gravity.
- the inclination sensor may further include at least one second inclination sensor located on the base mount 102, 1102 or the truck 10 (e.g., sensors 420D and/or 420E), in which case the inclination of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may be determined based on the position of the first inclination sensor relative to the second inclination sensor.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 has a first angle with respect to gravity or with respect to the second inclination sensor.
- the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is upright, such that the first angle between the sensor 420C and (i) gravity; or (ii) with respect to sensor 420D should be approximately zero or another initial value.
- the first angle may be calibrated when the truck 10 is not moving and the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- the current angle of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is compared to the first angle of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 during normal operation of the truck 10, and when a difference between the angles meets or exceeds a predetermined threshold, this difference is indicative of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- the signal for the sensed current angle may be filtered to remove noise/jitter.
- the predetermined threshold may be set to any angle, e.g., an angle of 45 degrees, such that when the difference between the first angle and the current angle meets or exceeds this threshold value, this is indicative of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 having deflected and no longer being aligned with the base mount 102, 1102. If only the first inclination sensor associated with the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is used, the first inclination sensor may incorrectly detect a failure if the truck 10 is traveling along an incline. To prevent the sensor from incorrectly detecting a failure, the predetermined threshold may be set to a greater angle to include a grade limit, e.g., 10 degrees, of the truck 10.
- a grade limit e.g. 10 degrees
- the one or more sensors 420A-420C may detect an acceleration of the upper boom portion 104, 1104, in which the acceleration exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- an acceleration of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 in which the acceleration exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with the base mount 102, 1102.
- one or more of the sensors 420A-420C may comprise an accelerometer 403 that is associated with the upper boom portion 1104, e.g., attached to the lower element 1166 of the connector 1164, and may measure the acceleration of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 in one or more axes.
- the accelerometer 403 may generate acceleration signals used by a processor on the truck 10 (e.g., microprocessor 510 shown in FIG. 48 ) to generate acceleration values, from which the processor can determine if the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 has yielded or failed. Because the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is very rigid, the accelerometer 403 may be mounted anywhere along the length of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 and generate signals sufficient to detect adapter failure. The accelerometer 403 on the upper boom portion 104, 1104 senses the total acceleration of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 relative to ground.
- acceleration of the upper boom portion 1104 may occur when the truck 10 accelerates in either a power unit first direction 290 or a forks first direction 292.
- Forces acting on the upper boom portion 1104 causing it to accelerate may include a force applied by the truck 10 to the upper boom portion 1104 during acceleration of the truck 10, a force applied by the truck 10 to the upper boom portion 1104 during deceleration of the truck 10, and an impact force striking the upper boom portion 1104. If the total acceleration of the upper boom portion 1104 is greater than a threshold total acceleration, the adapter 2150 will fail. If the magnitude of the total deceleration of the upper boom portion 1104 is greater than a magnitude of a threshold total acceleration, the adapter 2150 will fail.
- the adapter 2150 comprising the first and second coupling bars 2152, 2154
- similar calculations may be performed for the adapter 150 comprising the first and second shear pins 180, 182 (see FIG. 8 ) and the adapter 1150 comprising the first and second coupling plates 1152, 1154 (see FIG. 16 ).
- the first term ((0.5) F g y cg ) is a moment of a force F g from half of the weight of the upper boom portion 1104.
- the second term ((0.5) m upper a upper ( z cg )) is a moment resulting from half of the mass of the upper boom portion 1104 accelerating due to the truck 10 accelerating and causing the upper boom portion 1104 to accelerate and/or an impact force striking the upper boom portion 1104 causing the upper boom portion 1104 to accelerate.
- the bending stress ⁇ may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel from which each coupling bar 2152, 2154 is formed. Yield strengths for such materials are well known. When the bending stress ⁇ occurring in each one of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 equals the yield strength ⁇ yield strength of the material from which each coupling bar 2152, 2154 is formed, each coupling bar 2152, 2154 will fail or yield, i.e., permanently deform or bend.
- the width W for the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152 equals width W 2170 shown in FIG. 21
- the width W for the middle section 2172 of the second coupling bar 2154 equals width W 2172 shown in FIG. 19 .
- the cross-sectional area A bar for the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152 may be determined by multiplying the width W 2170 of the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152 by the depth D 2170 (see FIG. 19 ) of the middle section 2170 of the first coupling bar 2152.
- the cross-sectional area A bar of the middle section 2172 for the second coupling bar 2154 may be determined by multiplying the width W 2172 of the middle section 2172 of the second coupling bar 2152 by the depth D 2172 of the middle section 2172 of the second coupling bar 2154 (see FIG. 19 ).
- Equation (10) is solved for the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg causing the adapter 2150 to fail when the total acceleration of the upper boom portion 1104 is in a direction towards the power unit 14 and equal to the first threshold total acceleration such that the upper boom portion 1104 fails and rotates in a clockwise direction, as viewed in FIG. 54 .
- Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will fail when the total acceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 (see FIG. 49 ) is in the power unit first direction 290 and equal to or greater than the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg .
- Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will also fail when the total deceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 is in the forks first direction 292 (i.e., acceleration in the power unit first direction 290) and the magnitude of the deceleration is equal to or greater than the magnitude of the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg .
- Equation (11) is solved for the second threshold total acceleration a TotalPos causing the adapter 2150 to fail when the total acceleration of the upper boom portion 1104 is in a direction towards the forks 16 and equal to the second threshold total acceleration such that the upper boom portion 1104 rotates in a counter-clockwise direction, as viewed in FIG. 56 .
- Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will fail when the acceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 is in the forks first direction 292 and equal to or greater than the second threshold total acceleration a TotalPos .
- Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will also fail when the total deceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 is in the power unit first direction 290 (i.e., acceleration in the forks first direction 292) and the magnitude of the deceleration is equal to or greater than the magnitude of the second threshold total acceleration a Totalpos .
- the threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg is calculated using Equation (10) to equal -1.1 g, where "g" is the acceleration due to gravity or 9.8 meter/second 2 .
- the processor determines that the adapter 2150 has failed. Acceleration in the power unit first direction 290 is defined as being negative.
- the threshold total acceleration a TotalPos is calculated using Equation (11) to equal 1.6 g.
- the processor determines that the adapter 2150 has failed.
- the sensors 420A-420E each detect the corresponding parameter(s) and generate one or more signals based on detecting the corresponding parameter(s).
- the IMS 420 comprises one or more controllers that are configured to receive the signals, e.g., via the network bus 432 depicted in FIG. 47B .
- the one or more controllers may include the computer system 500 that implements one or more of the modules 424, 426, 428, 430 depicted in FIG. 47B .
- the one or more controllers may also be configured to transmit a signal that causes the user interface 442 to display an indication of the error code.
- the indication may include one or more of a symbol or graphic, a light, an audible tone, etc. and may notify the operator that a potential failure has been detected and that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 may be in the deformed position.
- the at least one controller receives at least one signal from at least one sensor 420A-420E (see FIGS. 1A and 1B ), and at 702, the at least one controller, determines, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter 150, 1150, 2150 to yield.
- the at least one controller may generate an error code.
- the at least one controller may transmit a signal that causes a user interface of the truck 10 to display an indication of the error code.
- the brake 436 may be activated and/or operation of at least one of the steer motor 434, the traction motor 440, or the lift motor 444 may be altered based on the error code, at 708.
- the truck 10 may be restarted immediately (i.e., prior to clearing the error code) at 710.
- the truck 10 is then operated in a "limp mode" at 712, where the speed of the truck 10 is limited, e.g., ⁇ 1 mph.
- the truck 10 is moved in limp mode from a first location, e.g., a location near where the impact occurred and the traction motor 440 was shut off, to a second location, a location that is out of a path of travel of other trucks or a service location.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 and/or the truck 10 may be inspected for damage, and at 716, at least a portion of the base mount 102, 1102, the upper boom portion 104, 1104, the adapter 150, 1150, 2150, and/or the sensor(s) 420A-420E may be replaced.
- the error code may be cleared at 718.
- the error code may be cleared automatically upon replacement or installation of the upper boom portion 104, 1104 and restarting of the truck 10.
- the error code may be cleared by resetting the sensor 420A-420E, e.g., moving the lever 407-2 of the limit switch 407 back to the upright position (see FIGS. 50 and 51 ).
- the truck 10 is restarted at 720, and normal operation of the truck 10 may be resumed at 722, after which the process may terminate.
- the boom assembly 100, 1100 and/or the truck 10 may be inspected for damage, and at least a portion of the base mount 102, 1102, the upper boom portion 104, 1104, the adapter 150, 1150, 2150, and/or the sensor(s) 420A-420E may be replaced at 724 prior to attempting to restart the truck 10.
- the error code is then cleared at 726, the truck 10 is restarted at 728, and normal operation of the truck 10 may be resumed at 730, after which the process may terminate.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Transportation (AREA)
- Structural Engineering (AREA)
- Civil Engineering (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Geology (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
- Forklifts And Lifting Vehicles (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application claims the benefit of
, entitled "BOOM ASSEMBLY HAVING AN ADAPTER" (Attorney Docket No. 2304/CRN1079MA);U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/506,894, filed June 8, 2023 , entitled "BOOM ASSEMBLY HAVING AN ADAPTER" (Attorney Docket No. 2304/CRN1079MA2);U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/578,672, filed August 25, 2023 , entitled "INTEGRITY MONITORING SYSTEM FOR A BOOM ASSEMBLY" (Attorney Docket No. 2318/CRN1079MA3); andU.S. Provisional Application No. 63/578,769, filed August 25, 2023 , entitled "INTEGRITY MONITORING SYSTEM FOR A BOOM ASSEMBLY", the disclosures of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.U.S Application No. 18/733,363, filed June 4, 2024 - The present disclosure relates to an integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly and more specifically to an integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly having a yielding adapter that allows for controlled failure of the boom assembly.
- A boom assembly may be used to position an accessory such as a camera at a desired vertical and/or horizontal position.
- In accordance with a first aspect of the present disclosure, a boom assembly is provided and comprises: an upper boom portion, a base mount, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion. The upper boom portion may be aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position. Further provided is an integrity monitoring system comprising at least one sensor associated with the boom assembly, wherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed angular position relative to the base mount. The at least one sensor may be configured to detect a parameter related to the upper boom portion to indicate that the upper boom portion has deflected such that the upper boom portion is no longer aligned with the base mount.
- The sensor may detect an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount. The predetermined threshold may be calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold.
- The sensor may detect an angular velocity of the upper boom portion, wherein the angular velocity of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The sensor may comprise a strain gauge that detects a strain level in the adapter, wherein the strain level in the adapter exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The sensor may detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion relative to a predetermined reference, wherein the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The at least one sensor may be configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing the parameter. The boom assembly may further comprise at least one controller configured to: receive the at least one signal; and determine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- The at least one controller may be further configured to generate an alert in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- In accordance with a second aspect, a materials handling vehicle is provided comprising: a power unit; a load handling assembly extending from the power unit and comprising a pair of forks; an operator's station comprising an operator's backrest and an operator's platform; a boom assembly associated with the materials handling vehicle; and an integrity monitoring system comprising at least one sensor mounted to at least one of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station. The boom assembly may comprise a base mount, an upper boom portion, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion. The upper boom portion may be aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position, wherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount. The at least one sensor may be configured to detect a parameter related to the upper boom portion to indicate that the upper boom portion has deflected such that the upper boom portion is no longer aligned with the base mount.
- The at least one sensor may be configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing a corresponding parameter. The materials handling vehicle may further comprise at least one controller configured to: receive the at least one signal; and determine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- The materials handling vehicle may further comprise a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor, and wherein in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield, the at least one controller is configured to generate an error code that activates the brake and/or alters operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor.
- In response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield, the at least one controller may be configured to: generate an error code; and transmit a signal that causes a user interface to display an indication of the error code.
- The sensor may detect an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount. The predetermined threshold may be calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold.
- The sensor may detect an angular velocity of the upper boom portion, wherein the angular velocity of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The sensor may comprise a strain gauge that detects a strain level in the adapter, wherein the strain level in the adapter exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The sensor may detect a change in a position of the upper boom portion relative to a predetermined reference, wherein the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- In accordance with a third aspect, a method of controlling a materials handling vehicle is provided, wherein the materials handling vehicle comprises: a power unit, a load handling assembly, an operator's station, a boom assembly, and an integrity monitoring system. The boom assembly may comprise a base mount, an upper boom portion, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion. The upper boom portion may be aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position and the adapter may be configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount. The integrity monitoring system may comprise at least one controller and at least one sensor mounted to one or more of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station. The method may comprise: receiving, by the at least one controller, at least one signal from the at least one sensor; and determining, by the at least one controller, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount.
- In response to determining that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount, generating, by the at least one controller, an error code; and transmitting, by the at least one controller, a signal that causes a user interface of the materials handling vehicle to display an indication of the error code.
- The materials handling vehicle may further comprise a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor. The method may further comprise: in response to determining that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount, generating, by the at least one controller, an error code; and based on the error code, activating the brake and/or altering operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor.
- The method may further comprise: restarting the materials handling vehicle; operating the material handling vehicle in limp mode, wherein a speed of the materials handling vehicle is limited; moving the materials handling vehicle in limp mode from a first location to a second location; replacing at least a portion of one or more of the base mount, the upper boom portion, the adapter, or the at least one sensor; clearing the error code; restarting the materials handling vehicle; and resuming normal operation of the materials handling vehicle.
- The method may further comprise: replacing at least a portion of one or more of the base mount, the upper boom portion, the adapter, or the at least one sensor; clearing the error code; restarting the materials handling vehicle; and resuming normal operation of the materials handling vehicle.
- The features of any embodiment of any aspect of the invention may be combined with any other aspect and embodiment described herein, unless such combination is clearly incompatible, and all such combinations are envisaged and disclosed herein. For example, the boom assembly and all of its optional features and embodiments as disclosed herein above and below, including the claims (e.g. according to the first aspect) may be combined with any materials handling vehicle and its optional features and embodiments as disclosed herein above and below, including the claims (e.g. according to the second aspect). Similarly, the methods and all of its optional features and embodiments as disclosed herein above and below, including the claims (e.g. according to the third aspect) may be combined with any materials handling vehicle of the disclosure, and/or with any boom assembly of the disclosure.
-
-
FIGS. 1A and1B are perspective views of materials handling vehicles comprising a boom assembly, an adapter, and an integrity monitoring system in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIGS. 2-5 are partially exploded views of a portion of the boom assembly and the materials handling vehicle illustrated inFIG. 1B . -
FIG. 6 is a detailed perspective view of the portion of the boom assembly and the materials handling vehicle illustrated inFIGS. 2-5 following assembly. -
FIGS. 7 and8 are partially exploded views of an adapter in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIGS. 9-12 are partially exploded views of portions of a boom assembly and the adapter illustrated inFIGS. 7 and8 . -
FIG. 13 is a detailed perspective view of the boom assembly and the adapter illustrated inFIGS. 9-12 following assembly. -
FIGS. 14 and15 are partially exploded views of a portion of the boom assembly and adapter with at least one coupling member comprising coupling plates in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 16 is a detailed perspective view of the portion of the boom assembly and the adapter illustrated inFIGS. 14 and15 following assembly. -
FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view taken through a center of the adapter inFIG. 16 . -
FIG. 18 is a detailed perspective view of the portion of the boom assembly and the adapter ofFIG. 16 , in which the adapter comprises a cover. -
FIGS. 19 and20 are partially exploded views of a portion of the boom assembly and adapter with at least one coupling element comprising coupling bars in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 21 is a detailed side view of one of the coupling bars of the adapter ofFIGS. 19 and20 . -
FIG. 22 is a detailed perspective view of the portion of the boom assembly and the adapter illustrated inFIGS. 19 and20 following assembly. -
FIG. 23 is a detailed perspective view of the portion of the boom assembly and the adapter ofFIG. 22 , in which the adapter comprises a cover. -
FIGS. 24 and 25 are partially exploded views of a distal end of an upper boom portion, an adapter bracket, and an accessory in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 26 is a perspective view of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with the adapter ofFIGS. 7-13 in a first shear state, in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIGS. 27 and28 are detailed perspective views of the adapter illustrated inFIG. 26 . -
FIG. 29 is a perspective view of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with the adapter ofFIGS. 7-13 in a second shear state, in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 30 is a detailed perspective view of the adapter illustrated inFIG. 29 . -
FIG. 31 is a perspective view of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with the adapter ofFIG. 16 in a first failed state, in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 32 is a detailed perspective view of the adapter ofFIG. 31 and a portion of the boom assembly. -
FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with the adapter ofFIG. 16 in a second failed state, in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 34 is a detailed perspective view of the adapter ofFIG. 33 and a portion of the boom assembly. -
FIG. 35 is a perspective view of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with the adapter ofFIG. 22 in a first failed state, in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 36 is a detailed perspective view of the adapter ofFIG. 35 and a portion of the boom assembly. -
FIG. 37 is a perspective view of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with the adapter ofFIG. 22 in a second failed state, in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 38 is a detailed perspective view of the adapter ofFIG. 37 and a portion of the boom assembly. -
FIGS. 39-41 are side views of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with an adapter in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 42 is a perspective view of the adapter ofFIGS. 7-13 . -
FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the adapter ofFIG. 16 . -
FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view taken along line 44-44 inFIG. 43 . -
FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken through a center of the adapter inFIG. 43 . -
FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the adapter ofFIG. 22 . -
FIG. 47A is a block diagram of a system of electronics on a materials handling vehicle in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 47B is a block diagram of operational modules comprising an integrity monitoring system in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 48 is a block diagram of a computer processing system capable of implementing any of the systems, modules, or methods (or subsets thereof) described herein, in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 49 is a perspective view of a portion of a boom assembly and an adapter comprising at least one sensor in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIGS. 50 and 51 are side views of a portion of a boom assembly and an adapter comprising a limit switch before and after failure in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIGS. 52 and 53 are side views of a portion of a boom assembly and an adapter comprising a proximity sensor before and after failure in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIGS. 54-60 are side views of a materials handling vehicle comprising a boom assembly with an adapter in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary process for determining whether an adapter has failed in accordance with the present disclosure. -
FIGS. 62-64 are flowcharts illustrating exemplary processes of controlling a materials handling vehicle in accordance with the present disclosure. - A materials handling vehicle constructed in accordance with the present disclosure is shown in
FIGS. 1A ,1B , and39 . The materials handling vehicle is depicted as a low levelorder picking truck 10 that includes aload handling assembly 12 extending from apower unit 14. Theload handling assembly 12 includes a pair offorks 16, eachfork 16 having a load supportingwheel assembly 18. Theload handling assembly 12 may include other load handling features in addition to, or in lieu of, the illustrated arrangement of theforks 16, such as scissors-type elevating forks, outriggers, or separate height adjustable forks. Still further, theload handling assembly 12 may include load handling features such as a mast, a load platform, collection cage, or other support structure carried by theforks 16 or otherwise provided for handling a load supported and carried by thetruck 10 or pushed or pulled by thetruck 10, i.e., such as by a tugger vehicle. Acompartment 44 may contain a battery, control electronics, and motor(s) (not shown), such as a traction motor/brake assembly, steer motor, and/or lift motor for theforks 16. The traction motor/brake assembly may be coupled to asteerable drive wheel 22 for driving and braking thedrive wheel 22. First and second caster wheels (only thefirst caster wheel 46 is illustrated) are coupled to opposing sides of thepower unit 14. - The illustrated
power unit 14 comprises a step-through operator'sstation 30 defined by an operator'sbackrest 34, aside wall 48 of thecompartment 44, and a floorboard or operator'splatform 32. The operator may stand on the operator'splatform 32 to drive the truck 10 (seeFIG. 39 ), and/or the operator'splatform 32 may provide a position from which the operator may operate the various included features of thetruck 10. When the operator is standing on the operator'splatform 32, acontrol area 40 provides for driving thetruck 10 and for controlling the features of theload handling assembly 12. - With reference to
FIGS. 1A and1B , as shown for purposes of illustration, and not by way of limitation, thecontrol area 40 comprises ahandle 52 for steering thetruck 10, which may include controls such as grips, butterfly switches, thumbwheels, rocker switches, a hand wheel, a steering tiller, etc., for controlling the acceleration/braking and travel direction of thetruck 10. For example, as shown, a control such as a switch grip (not labeled) may be provided on thehandle 52, which is spring biased to a center neutral position. Rotating the switch grip forward and upward will cause thetruck 10 to move forward, e.g., power unit first, at an acceleration proportional to the amount of rotation of the switch grip until thetruck 10 reaches a predefined maximum speed, at which point thetruck 10 is no longer permitted to accelerate to a higher speed. For example, if the switch grip is very quickly rotated 50% of a maximum angle of rotation capable for the grip, thetruck 10 will accelerate at approximately 50% of the maximum acceleration capable for thetruck 10 until thetruck 10reaches 50% of the maximum speed capable for thetruck 10. It is also contemplated that acceleration may be determined using an acceleration map stored in memory where the rotation angle of the grip is used as an input into and has a corresponding acceleration value in the acceleration map. The acceleration values in the acceleration map corresponding to the grip rotation angles may be proportional to the grip rotation angles or vary in any desired manner. There may also be a velocity map stored in memory where the rotation angle of the grip is used as an input into and has a corresponding maximum velocity value stored in the velocity map. For example, when the grip is rotated 50% of the maximum angle capable for the grip, thetruck 10 will accelerate at a corresponding acceleration value stored in the acceleration map to a maximum velocity value stored in the velocity map corresponding to the grip angle of 50% of the maximum angle. Similarly, rotating the switch grip downward and toward the rear of thetruck 10 will cause thetruck 10 to move in reverse, e.g., forks first, at an acceleration proportional to the amount of rotation of the switch grip until thetruck 10 reaches a predefined maximum speed, at which point thetruck 10 is no longer permitted to accelerate to a higher speed. - One or more proximity or
presence sensors 58 may be provided to detect the presence of an operator on thetruck 10. For example, presence sensor(s) 58 may be located on, above, or under a floor of the operator'splatform 32, or otherwise provided about the operator'sstation 30. In theexemplary truck 10 ofFIGS. 1A and1B , the presence sensor(s) 58 is/are shown in dashed lines indicating that it/they is/are positioned under the floor of the operator'splatform 32. Under this arrangement, the presence sensor(s) 58 may comprise load sensors, switches, etc. As an alternative (not shown), the presence sensor(s) 58 may be implemented above the floor of the operator'splatform 32, such as by using ultrasonic, capacitive, or other suitable sensing technology. Thepresence sensor 58 generates an operator status signal indicating that either an operator is standing on the operator'splatform 32 in the operator'sstation 30 or no operator is standing on the operator'splatform 32 in the operator'sstation 30. A change in the operator status signal indicates that an operator has either entered or exited the operator'sstation 30. - With continued reference to
FIGS. 1A ,1B , and39 , anantenna 66 extends vertically from thepower unit 14 and is provided for receiving control signals from a corresponding wireless remote control device (not shown). It is also contemplated that theantenna 66 may be provided within thecompartment 44 of thepower unit 14 or elsewhere on thetruck 10. The remote control device may comprise a transmitter that is worn or otherwise maintained by the operator. The remote control device is manually operable by an operator, e.g., by pressing a button or other control, to cause the remote control device to wirelessly transmit at least a first type of signal designating a travel request to thetruck 10. The travel request is a command that requests the correspondingtruck 10 to travel by a predetermined amount. - The
truck 10 may also comprise one or more obstacle sensors (not shown), which are provided about thetruck 10, e.g., towards a front end of thepower unit 14 and/or to the sides of thepower unit 14. The obstacle sensor(s) may include at least one contactless obstacle sensor on thetruck 10 and may be operable to define at least one detection zone. The obstacle sensor(s) may comprise any suitable proximity detection technology, such as one or more ultrasonic sensors, optical recognition devices, infrared sensors, laser scanner sensors, etc., which may be capable of detecting the presence of objects/obstacles or may be capable of generating signals that can be analyzed to detect the presence of objects/obstacles within the predefined detection zone(s) of thepower unit 14. - In practice, the
truck 10 may be implemented in other formats, styles and features, such as an end control pallet truck that includes a steering tiller arm that is coupled to a tiller handle for steering the truck. Still further, the truck, remote control system, and/or components thereof, including the remote control device, may comprise any additional and/or alternative features or implementations, examples of which are disclosed in any one or more of the following commonly owned patents/published patent applications: entitled "SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF REMOTELY CONTROLLING A MATERIALS HANDLING VEHICLE";U.S. Pat. No. 9,082,293, issued Jul. 14, 2015 U.S. Pat. No. 8,072,309, issued Dec. 6, 2011 entitled "SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF REMOTELY CONTROLLING A MATERIALS HANDLING VEHICLE"; , entitled "FINGER-MOUNTED APPARATUS FOR REMOTELY CONTROLLING A MATERIALS HANDLING VEHICLE"; and/orU.S. Pat. No. 9,207,673, issued Dec. 8, 2015 , entitled "MULTIPLE ZONE SENSING FOR MATERIALS HANDLING VEHICLES"; the entire disclosures of which are each hereby incorporated by reference herein.U.S. Pat. No. 9,645,968, issued May 9, 2017 - In the example shown in
FIGS. 1A ,1B , and39 , thetruck 10 may comprise the operator'sbackrest 34 and aseparate load backrest 20. The operator'sbackrest 34 faces toward thepower unit 14 and is fixed to the operator'splatform 32, such that the operator'sbackrest 34 does not move vertically relative to the operator'splatform 32. Theload backrest 20, which forms part of theload handling assembly 12 and may move vertically with the other components of theload handling assembly 12, faces toward theforks 16 and serves as a backstop for a load positioned on theforks 16. In other examples (not shown), thetruck 10 may comprise a single backrest that serves as both the operator's backrest and the load backrest. The operator'sbackrest 34 may comprise awall 50 extending generally vertically above the operator'splatform 32 and asupport pad 36 coupled to thewall 50. During operation of thetruck 10, the operator may stand against thesupport pad 36. - A
100, 1100 may be associated with, i.e., coupled to, theboom assembly truck 10, and anaccessory 300 may be coupled to the 100, 1100. In the example shown inboom assembly FIGS. 1A ,1B , and2 , the 100, 1100 is removably coupled to the operator'sboom assembly backrest 34, as described herein. In other examples (not shown), the 100, 1100 may be welded or otherwise secured directly to the operator'sboom assembly backrest 34. In further examples (not shown), the 100, 1100 may be offset from the operator'sboom assembly backrest 34 and may be secured to another component of thetruck 10, such as theload handling assembly 12. The 100, 1100 may extend above the operator'sboom assembly station 30 and over theforks 16, such that theaccessory 300 is positioned above theforks 16. Theaccessory 300 may comprise, for example, a camera or other imaging device, a light detection and ranging (Lidar) device, a light or object/image projecting device, a sound emitting device, a wireless internet device, or any combination thereof. - With reference to
FIGS. 1A ,1B , and2 , the 100, 1100 comprises aboom assembly lower boom portion 102, 1102 (referred to herein as a base mount) and an 104, 1104. Theupper boom portion 102, 1102 is coupled to thebase mount 104, 1104 via anupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 that is configured to yield when theadapter 104, 1104, or at least one coupling member thereof, is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150, or at least one coupling member thereof, to yield, such that theadapter 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102, as described herein.base mount - As shown in
FIGS. 2-5 , the 102, 1102 may comprise abase mount 106, 1106, amain body first flange 108A, asecond flange 108B, afirst bracket 116A, and asecond bracket 116B. The first and 108A, 108B are coupled and secured to thesecond flanges 106, 1106, e.g., via welding. In the example shown, themain body 106, 1106 is hollow and comprises a generally rectangular cross-section. In other examples, themain body 106, 1106 may comprise a different shape than that shown, such as a circular cross-sectional shape. Themain body 102, 1102 may be coupled to the operator'sbase mount backrest 34 via the first and 108A, 108B and the first andsecond flanges 116A, 116B. The first andsecond brackets 108A, 108B may be positioned on one side of the operator'ssecond flanges backrest 34, e.g., facing toward the power unit 14 (not visible inFIGS. 2-5 ; seeFIGS. 1A and1B ), and the first and 116A, 116B may be positioned opposite the first andsecond brackets 108A, 108B, e.g., facing toward the forks 16 (not visible insecond flanges FIGS. 2-5 ; seeFIGS. 1A and1B ). - With reference to
FIG. 2 , the first and 116A, 116B may each comprise a "C" shape with asecond brackets respective notch 116A-1, 116B-1 that fits over and receives abar 38 comprising an upper portion of the operator'sbackrest 34. The 106, 1106 may also comprise a notch 106-1 that fits over and receives themain body bar 38. Aretention plate 254 is positioned opposite the first and 116A, 116B. Thesecond brackets 102, 1102 may further comprise abase mount support plate 258 coupled to the 106, 1106, e.g., via welding, that may at least partially surround a portion of themain body 106, 1106 adjacent to the notch 106-1.main body Fasteners 118 extend throughapertures 255 formed in theretention plate 254 and are received in threadedapertures 259 formed in thesupport plate 258 to secure theretention plate 254 to the 106, 1106 of themain body 102, 1102 via thebase mount support plate 258.Fasteners 119 extend through apertures 257 (only two of theapertures 257 are labeled inFIG. 2 ) formed in theretention plate 254 and are received in threaded 117A, 117B formed in the first andapertures 116A, 116B (only one of the threadedsecond brackets 117A, 117B is labeled inapertures FIG. 2 ) to secure the first and 116A, 116B to thesecond brackets retention plate 254, such that thebar 38 of the operator'sbackrest 34 is received in thenotches 116A-1, 116B-1 of the first and 116A, 116B to clamp thesecond brackets bar 38 between the first and 116A, 116B and thesecond brackets retention plate 254. Washers (not labeled) may be positioned between the 118, 119 and thefasteners retention plate 254. Upon assembly, an upper half (not labeled) of each of the first and 116A, 116B may extend above thesecond brackets bar 38, and a lower half (not labeled) of each of the first and 116A, 116B may extend below thesecond brackets bar 38. Thewall 50 comprises at least one opening 50-1 through which the lower half of each of the first and 116A, 116B extends for coupling to thesecond brackets retention plate 254. When the first and 116A, 116B are coupled to thesecond brackets retention plate 254, the first and 116A, 116B may engage, i.e., physically contact, thesecond brackets retention plate 254. - With reference to
FIG. 3 , adoubler plate 256 is positioned opposite the first and 108A, 108B.second flanges Fasteners 112 extend throughapertures 261 formed in thedoubler plate 256, through apertures (not visible) formed in thewall 50 of the operator'sbackrest 34, and throughrespective apertures 109A formed in the first and 108A, 108B (only thesecond flanges aperture 109A in thefirst flange 108A is visible inFIG. 3 ) and may be secured, e.g., via nuts 114. - As shown in
FIG. 4 , asplice plate 260 may be secured to the 106, 1106 of themain body 102, 1102 between the first andbase mount 116A, 116B on a side of thesecond brackets 106, 1106 opposite themain body retention plate 254. The 106, 1106 may comprisemain body 262, 264 coupled thereto, e.g., via welding, and positioned above and below the notch 106-1 (not visible inadditional support plates FIG. 4 ; seeFIG. 2 ). 266, 268 may extend through apertures 260-1 formed in the splice plate 260 (only four of the apertures 260-1 are labeled inFasteners FIG. 4 ) and be received in corresponding threaded 263, 265 formed in theapertures additional support plates 262, 264 (only two of the threadedapertures 263 are labeled inFIG. 4 and only two of the threadedapertures 265 are visible inFIG. 4 ). Washers (not labeled) may be positioned between the 266, 268 and thefasteners splice plate 260. - Upon coupling of the first and
116A, 116B to thesecond brackets retention plate 254 about thebar 38, coupling of thesplice plate 260 to the 106, 1106, and coupling of themain body doubler plate 256 to the first and 108A, 108B through thesecond flanges wall 50 of the operator'sbackrest 34, the 102, 1102 is fixed to the operator'sbase mount backrest 34, and the 102, 1102, specifically thebase mount 106, 1106 extends generally vertically above the operator'smain body platform 32, as shown inFIGS. 1A and1B . The first and 116A, 116B, the first andsecond brackets 108A, 108B, thesecond flanges doubler plate 256, and thesplice plate 260 help to stabilize the 102, 1102 and secure thebase mount 102, 1102 to the operator'sbase mount backrest 34 and also help to stabilize the 104, 1104. Theupper boom portion 100, 1100 may be field installable and may be configured for retrofitting to the operator'sboom assembly backrest 34 of existing trucks via the first and 116A, 116B and the first andsecond brackets 108A, 108B, as shown insecond flanges FIGS. 2-4 . - With reference to
FIGS. 5 and6 , a pair of 272, 274 may be added to help support and strengthen the operator'sbraces backrest 34. The operator'sbackrest 34 may comprise a pair of 39, 41 that are coupled to theposts bar 38 defining the upper portion of thebackrest 34, with thebar 38 extending generally horizontally between the 39, 41. One of theposts braces 272 may be attached to one of theposts 39, and theother brace 274 may be attached to theother post 41. With reference to thebrace 274, a plurality of 276A, 276B, 276C may be used to attach thebrackets brace 274 to thepost 41. Thebrace 274 may comprise an "L" shape, and the 276A, 276B, 276C may comprise a quadrant or quarter-circular shape that fits around thebrackets post 41.Fasteners 278 extend throughapertures 273 formed along one edge of an upper portion of thebrace 274 and are received in corresponding threaded 277A, 277B, 277C formed in one end of theapertures 276A, 276B, 276C.brackets Fasteners 280 extend through apertures 275 (only oneaperture 275 is visible inFIG. 5 ) formed along the other edge of the upper portion of thebrace 274 and are received in corresponding threaded apertures (not visible) formed in the other end (not visible) of the 276A, 276B, 276C. A plurality ofbrackets brackets 286A, 286B, 286C may similarly be used to attach an upper portion of thebrace 272 to thepost 39. - The
272, 274 may extend beyond theirbraces 39, 41 and along a lower portion of therespective post wall 50, as shown inFIGS. 5 and6 . With reference to thebrace 274 inFIG. 5 , one ormore fasteners 282 extend through one or moreadditional apertures 279 formed along one edge of a lower portion of thebrace 274 and are received in corresponding threaded aperture(s) 51 formed in thewall 50. One ormore fasteners 284 extend through one or more additional apertures (not visible) formed in thewall 50 and are received in corresponding threaded aperture(s) 281 formed along the other edge of the lower portion of thebrace 274. A lower portion of thebrace 272 may be attached to thewall 50 in a similar manner. - The
support pad 36 may be coupled to the operator'sbackrest 34 via a plurality of fasteners 270 (only twofasteners 270 are shown inFIG. 5 ) that extend through apertures (not visible) formed in thewall 50 and are received in threaded apertures formed in one or more metal plates (not visible) embedded within a polymeric pad portion of thesupport pad 36. Although thesupport pad 36 is depicted as being coupled to the operator'sbackrest 34 after attachment of the 102, 1102 and/or thebase mount 272, 274, thebraces support pad 36 may also be coupled to thebackrest 34 prior to, or at the same time as, attachment of the 102, 1102 and/or thebase mount 272, 274.braces - An additional example of a base mount is described in
(Attorney Docket No. 2304/CRN1079MA).U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/506,894 filed on June 8, 2023 - With reference to
FIGS. 7 and8 , theadapter 150 comprises anupper element 152 that is coupled to the upper boom portion 104 (theupper boom portion 104 is not shown inFIGS. 7 and8 ; seeFIG. 11 ), alower element 158 that is coupled to the base mount 102 (thebase mount 102 is not shown inFIGS. 7 and8 ; seeFIG. 9 ), afirst arm 172, asecond arm 174, afirst pin 180, asecond pin 182, a first gas spring or first piston and cylinder unit orassembly 176, and a second gas spring or second piston and cylinder unit orassembly 178, in which the first and second gas springs 176, 178 may have a fluid in the cylinder such as a gas comprising air (inFIG. 7 , thefirst arm 172 and thefirst gas spring 176 are omitted). - The
upper element 152 comprises a pair of upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 that are received in anupper support body 156 and coupled to theupper support body 156 viafasteners 200. In the example shown inFIG. 7 , fourfasteners 200 extend through apertures (not visible) formed in a front side of theupper support body 156 and are received in threaded apertures (not visible) formed in the upper engagement plate 154-1 to secure the upper engagement plate 154-1 to theupper support body 156. Although not visible inFIG. 7 ,fasteners 200 also extend through apertures formed in a back side of theupper support body 156 and are received in threaded apertures formed in the upper engagement plate 154-2 to secure the upper engagement plate 154-2 to the upper support body 156 (seeFIG. 13 ). - The
lower element 158 comprises a pair of lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 that are received in alower support body 162 and coupled to thelower support body 162 viafasteners 202. In the example shown inFIG. 7 , fourfasteners 202 extend through apertures (not visible) formed in a front side of thelower support body 162 and are received in threaded apertures (not visible) formed in the lower engagement plate 160-1 to secure the lower engagement plate 160-1 to thelower support body 162. Although not visible inFIG. 7 , fasteners also extend through apertures formed in a back side of thelower support body 162 and are received in threaded apertures formed in the lower engagement plate 160-2 to secure the lower engagement plate 160-2 to the lower support body 162 (seeFIG. 13 ). - As shown in
FIG. 8 , thefirst arm 172 may generally comprise a flattened "S" shape with a linear section 172-1, a first end 172-2 that extends away from the linear section 172-1 in a first direction, and a second end 172-3 that extends away from the linear section 172-1 in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction (see alsoFIG. 27 ). As best seen inFIG. 28 , thesecond arm 174 may similarly comprise a flattened "S" shape with a linear section 174-1, a first end 174-2 that extends away from the linear section 174-1 in a first direction, and a second end 174-3 that extends away from the linear section 174-1 in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction. - With reference to
FIGS. 7 ,8 ,27 , and30 , theupper support body 156 comprises a first extension 156-1 that extends outward from theupper support body 156 in a first direction, and a second extension 156-2 that extends outward from theupper support body 156 in a second direction opposite the first direction. A first end 176-1 of thefirst gas spring 176 is coupled to the first extension 156-1, and a second end 176-2 of thefirst gas spring 176 is coupled to the first end 172-2 of thefirst arm 172, as shown inFIGS. 8 and27 . Hence, thefirst arm 172 is coupled to theupper support body 156 via thefirst gas spring 176, which is coupled to the first extension 156-1. A first end 178-1 of thesecond gas spring 178 is similarly coupled to the second extension 156-2, and a second end 178-2 of thesecond gas spring 178 is coupled to the first end 174-2 of thesecond arm 174, as shown inFIG. 28 (see alsoFIG. 30 ). Hence, thesecond arm 174 is coupled to theupper support body 156 via thesecond gas spring 178, which is coupled to the second extension 156-2. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 7-9 , when theadapter 150 is in a normal operating position (i.e., prior to failure as described herein), the first and second gas springs 176, 178 may extend generally vertically between the respective first and second extensions 156-1, 156-2 and the first ends 172-2, 174-2 of the respective first and 172, 174 and may be generally parallel to thesecond arms main body 106 of thebase mount 102. In other examples (not shown), the first and second gas springs 176, 178 may extend at an angle with respect to themain body 106 and theupper boom portion 104. - As shown in
FIGS. 7 ,11 ,28 , and30 , theupper support body 156 comprises onehinge barrel 164 on one side and onehinge barrel 166 on the other side. Thehinge barrel 164 may comprise a support bracket orgusset 163 extending between thehinge barrel 164 and an adjacent portion of theupper support body 156 to help support thehinge barrel 164. Thehinge barrel 166 may similarly comprise a support bracket orgusset 167 extending between thehinge barrel 166 and an adjacent portion of theupper support body 156. Thelower support body 162 comprises twohinge barrels 168 on one side and twohinge barrels 170 on the other side. Eachhinge barrel 168 may comprise a support bracket orgusset 169 extending between the hinge barrels 168 and an adjacent portion of thelower support body 162. Eachhinge barrel 170 may similarly comprise a support bracket orgusset 171 extending between thehinge barrel 170 and an adjacent portion of thelower support body 162. - The hinge barrels 164, 168 and an aperture formed in the second end 172-3 of the
first arm 172 are aligned to receive thefirst pin 180, as shown inFIGS. 7 and8 , such that thefirst pin 180 couples the second end 172-3 of thefirst arm 172 to the upper and 156, 162 via thelower support bodies first pin 180 being received in the respective hinge barrels 164, 168 of the upper and 156, 162 and the aperture of thelower support bodies first arm 172. The hinge barrels 166, 170 and an aperture formed in the second end 174-3 of thesecond arm 174 are similarly aligned to receive thesecond pin 182, as shown inFIG. 28 , such that thesecond pin 182 couples the second end 174-3 of thesecond arm 174 to the upper and 156, 162 via thelower support bodies second pin 182 being received in the hinge barrels 166, 170 of the upper and 156, 162 and the aperture of thelower support bodies second arm 174. One ormore spacers 181 may be placed about thefirst pin 180 and between thefirst arm 172 and theadjacent hinge barrel 168 to maintain a desired spacing between thefirst arm 172 and theadjacent hinge barrel 168, as shown inFIG. 7 . One or more spacers (not shown) may similarly be placed between thesecond arm 174 and the adjacent hinge barrel 170 (seeFIG. 28 ). As shown inFIG. 8 , one or more snap rings 184 may be placed around ends of thefirst pin 180 to hold thefirst pin 180 in place. One or more snap rings 190 may similarly be used to hold thesecond pin 182 in place, as best seen inFIG. 30 . The first and 180, 182 may comprise shear pins that are configured to break or shear off upon application of a shear force equal to, or in excess of, a shear force threshold value, as described herein.second pins - With continued reference to
FIGS. 7 ,8 ,28 , and30 , thelower support body 162 may comprise afirst stop 186 and asecond stop 188 extending outward from opposing sides of thelower support body 162. Thefirst stop 186 may be positioned so that when theadapter 150 is in the normal, i.e., home, operating position as shown inFIG. 8 , the linear section 172-1 of thefirst arm 172 rests against thefirst stop 186, and the linear section 174-1 (seeFIG. 30 ) of thesecond arm 174 similarly rests against thesecond stop 188. - As shown in
FIGS. 9 and 10 , theadapter 150 may be coupled to themain body 106 of thebase mount 102. Themain body 106 of thebase mount 102 comprises a plurality ofapertures 107 formed on both sides. In the example shown inFIG. 9 , a front side of themain body 106 comprises fourapertures 107. A back side of themain body 106 also comprises fourapertures 107, although only a portion of theapertures 107 is visible. The lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 161-1, 161-2 (only the apertures 161-1 formed in the lower engagement plate 160-1 are visible inFIG. 9 ; see the apertures 161-2 formed in the lower engagement plate 160-2 inFIG. 30 ). The lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside themain body 106 of thebase mount 102. To secure theadapter 150, specifically thelower element 158 of theadapter 150, to themain body 106 of thebase mount 102, theadapter 150 may be inserted into thebase mount 102 so that the lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 are received in themain body 106, a lower surface of thelower support body 162 is seated against an upper surface of themain body 106, and the apertures 161 formed in the lower engagement plates 160-1, 160-2 are aligned with theapertures 107 formed in themain body 106.Fasteners 204 extend through theapertures 107 formed in the front side of themain body 106 and are received in the apertures 161 formed in the lower engagement plate 160-1. Although not visible inFIG. 10 ,fasteners 204 similarly extend through apertures formed in the back side of themain body 106 and are received in apertures formed in the lower engagement plate 160-2 (seeFIG. 13 ). Upon installation of theadapter 150 into themain body 106 of thebase mount 102, anouter surface 165 of thelower support body 162 may be flush with anouter surface 113 of themain body 106. - With reference to
FIGS. 11 and 12 , theupper boom portion 104 may be coupled to theadapter 150. In the example shown, theupper boom portion 104 is hollow and comprises a generally rectangular cross-section that corresponds to the cross-sectional shape of thebase mount 102. In other examples, theupper boom portion 104 may comprise a different shape, such as a circular cross-sectional shape. Theupper boom portion 104 may comprise afirst section 104A and asecond section 104B. In some examples, thesecond section 104B extends at an angle with respect to thefirst section 104A. In the example shown inFIGS. 1A and13 , thesecond section 104B extends substantially perpendicular, i.e., at an angle of about 90 degrees, +/- 5 degrees, with respect to thefirst section 104A (see alsoFIG. 1A ). In other examples (not shown), thesecond section 104B may extend at an angle of +/- 45 degrees from horizontal, e.g., parallel to a plane (not shown) defined by the operator'splatform 32 and/or theforks 16. In further examples (not shown), theupper boom portion 104 may comprise a single section that extends generally vertically above the operator'splatform 32. In the example shown inFIGS. 1A and13 , the first and 104A, 104B may be substantially equal in length. In other examples (not shown), thesecond sections first section 104A may comprise a different length than thesecond section 104B. Themain body 106 and theupper boom portion 104 may have a cross section with a width dimension ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches and a length dimension ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches. Themain body 106 and theupper boom portion 104 may be made from any metal, such as a steel, stainless steel, aluminum, etc., and may have a wall thickness ranging from 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch. An overall height of theboom assembly 100, i.e., the overall height of theboom assembly 100 above theforks 16 when theboom assembly 100 is installed, may range from 5.5 feet to 14 feet. - With continued reference to
FIGS. 11 and 12 , theupper boom portion 104, specifically thefirst section 104A, comprises a plurality ofapertures 105 formed on both sides. In the example shown inFIG. 11 , a front side of theupper boom portion 104 comprises fourapertures 105. Although not visible, a back side of theupper boom portion 104 also comprises four apertures. The upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 155-1, 155-2 (only one of the apertures 155-2 formed in the upper engagement plate 154-2 is visible inFIG. 11 ; see alsoFIG. 30 ). The upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside thefirst section 104A of theupper boom portion 104. To secure theupper boom portion 104 to theadapter 150, specifically to theupper element 152 of theadapter 150, thefirst section 104A of theupper boom portion 104 may be placed over theupper element 152 of theadapter 150 and positioned so that the upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 are received in thefirst section 104A, a lower surface of thefirst section 104A is seated against an upper surface of theupper support body 156, and the apertures 155-1, 155-2 formed in the upper engagement plates 154-1, 154-2 are aligned with theapertures 105 formed in theupper boom portion 104.Fasteners 206 extend through theapertures 105 formed in the front side of theupper boom portion 104 and are received in the apertures 155-1 formed in the upper engagement plate 154-1. Although not visible inFIG. 12 ,fasteners 206 similarly extend through apertures formed in the back side of theupper boom portion 104 and are received in the apertures 155-2 formed in the upper engagement plate 154-2 (seeFIG. 13 ). Upon installation of theupper boom portion 104 onto theadapter 150, anouter surface 159 of theupper support body 156 may be flush with anouter surface 115 of theupper boom portion 104. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 1A and13 , upon coupling of theupper boom portion 104 to theadapter 150, thefirst section 104A of theupper boom portion 104 extends generally vertically above the operator'splatform 32 and is generally vertically aligned with themain body 106 of thebase mount 102, e.g., aligned along a vertical axis v, as shown inFIG. 1A . Thesecond section 104B of theupper boom portion 104 may extend over, and generally parallel to, theforks 16 and perpendicular to thefirst section 104A and themain body 106 of thebase mount 102. - With reference to
FIGS. 14-18 , anexemplary adapter 1150 coupling thebase mount 1102 to theupper boom portion 1104 is described in detail. Theadapter 1150 comprises at least one coupling member that includes at least one coupling plate. In the example shown, theadapter 1150 comprises a firstupper plate mount 1156, a firstlower plate mount 1158, a secondupper plate mount 1160, and a secondlower plate mount 1162, and the at least one coupling member comprises afirst coupling plate 1152 and asecond coupling plate 1154. Thefirst coupling plate 1152 is joined to the first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158, e.g., via welding. The firstupper plate mount 1156 is coupled to theupper boom portion 1104, and the firstlower plate mount 1158 is coupled to thebase mount 1102, as described herein. Thesecond coupling plate 1154 is similarly joined to the second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162, e.g., via welding. The secondupper plate mount 1160 is coupled to theupper boom portion 1104, and the secondlower plate mount 1162 is coupled to thebase mount 1102, as described herein. Although two 1152, 1154 are shown, it should be understood that the at least one coupling member may include a single coupling plate, e.g., one ofcoupling plates 1152 or 1154.coupling plates - As shown in
FIG. 14 , themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102 comprises a plurality ofapertures 1107 formed on front and back sides. In the example shown, the front side of themain body 1106 comprises fourapertures 1107. The back side of themain body 1106 also comprises fourapertures 1107, although only some of theapertures 1107 are visible. The first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 each comprises a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 1158-1 (only the apertures 1158-1 formed in the firstlower plate mount 1158 are visible inFIG. 14 ). The first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. To secure theadapter 1150, specifically the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 and the first and 1152, 1154 joined thereto, to thesecond coupling plates main body 1106 of thebase mount 1102, the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 may be inserted into thebase mount 1102 so that the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 are received in themain body 1106, and the apertures 1158-1 formed in the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 are aligned with theapertures 1107 formed in themain body 1106.Fasteners 1204 extend through theapertures 1107 formed in the front side of themain body 1106 and are received in the apertures 1158-1 formed in the firstlower plate mount 1158.Fasteners 1204 similarly extend through theapertures 1107 formed in the back side of themain body 1106 and are received in the apertures (not visible) formed in the secondlower plate mount 1162. - With reference to
FIGS. 1B and39 , theupper boom portion 1104 may be coupled to theadapter 1150. In the example shown, theupper boom portion 1104 is hollow and comprises afirst section 1104A and asecond section 1104B. In some examples, thesecond section 1104B extends at an angle with respect to thefirst section 1104A. In the example shown inFIGS. 1B and39 , thesecond section 1104B extends substantially perpendicular, i.e., at an angle of about 90 degrees, +/- 5 degrees, with respect to thefirst section 1104A. In other examples (not shown), thesecond section 1104B may extend at an angle of +/- 45 degrees from horizontal, e.g., parallel to a plane (not shown) defined by the operator'splatform 32 and/or theforks 16. In further examples (not shown), theupper boom portion 1104 may comprise a single section that extends generally vertically above the operator'splatform 32. In the example shown inFIGS. 1B and39 , a length L1 of thefirst section 1104A may be different from, e.g., greater than, a length L2 of thesecond section 1104B. In other examples (not shown), the lengths L1, L2 of the first and 1104A, 1104B may be substantially equal. As shown insecond sections FIG. 14 , themain body 1106 may have a square or rectangular cross section with a first dimension D106-1 ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches and a second dimension D106-2 ranging from 0.5 inch to 6.0 inches, and theupper boom portion 1104 may have a circular cross section with a diameter dimension ranging from 1.0 inch to 3.0 inches Themain body 1106 and theupper boom portion 1104 may be made from any metal, such as a steel, stainless steel, aluminum, etc. Themain body 1106 may have a wall thickness ranging from 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch, and theupper boom portion 1104 may have a wall thickness ranging from 1/10 inch to 1/4 inch. An overall height of theboom assembly 1100, i.e., the overall height of theboom assembly 1100 above theforks 16 when theboom assembly 1100 is installed, may range from 5.5 feet to 14 feet. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 15-18 , theupper boom portion 1104 comprises a different cross-section, i.e., a generally circular cross-section, as compared to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102, and aconnector 1164 provides a transition between the generally rectangular cross-section of themain body 1106 to the generally circular cross-section of theupper boom portion 1104. In other examples (not shown), thebase mount 1102 and theupper boom portion 1104 may comprise the same cross-sectional shape. Theconnector 1164 may be positioned between theadapter 1150 and theupper boom portion 1104, as shown inFIG. 15 . Theconnector 1164 comprises alower element 1166 having a cross-sectional shape (i.e., generally rectangular) and dimensions that mirror the cross-sectional shape and dimensions of themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. Thelower element 1166 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to a lower surface (not visible) of anadapter plate 1168, and thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to an upper surface 1168-1 of theadapter plate 1168 opposite the lower surface.Gussets 1174 may be coupled, e.g., via welding, to thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 and may be further coupled, e.g., via welding, to the upper surface 1168-1 of theadapter plate 1168. Thegussets 1174 may help to attach thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 to theadapter plate 1168 and to stabilize theupper boom portion 1104. - As shown in
FIGS. 14 and15 , thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 comprises a plurality ofapertures 1105 formed on front and back sides, and the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 each comprises a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 1156-1, 1160-1. In the illustrated example, the front side of thelower element 1166 comprises fourapertures 1105. Although not visible, the back side of thelower element 1166 also comprises four apertures. The first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 each comprise four apertures 1156-1, 1160-1 (only two of the apertures 1160-1 formed in the secondupper plate mount 1160 are visible inFIG. 14 ). - The first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside the
lower element 1166 of theconnector 1164. To secure theupper boom portion 1104 to theadapter 1150, specifically to the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 and the first and 1152, 1154 joined thereto, thesecond coupling plates lower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 may be placed over the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 and positioned so that the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 are received in thelower element 1166 and the apertures 1156-1, 1160-1 formed in the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 are aligned with theapertures 1105 formed in thelower element 1166.Fasteners 1206 extend through theapertures 1105 formed in the front side of thelower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 1156-1 formed in the firstupper plate mount 1156. Although not visible inFIGS. 14 and15 ,fasteners 1206 similarly extend through apertures formed in the back side of thelower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 1160-1 formed in the secondupper plate mount 1160. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 1B ,15 , and39 , upon coupling of theupper boom portion 1104 to theadapter 1150 and when theadapter 1150 is in a normal operating position (i.e., prior to failure as described herein), thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 extends generally vertically above the operator'splatform 32 and is generally vertically aligned with themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102, e.g., aligned along a vertical axis v. Thesecond section 1104B of theupper boom portion 1104 may extend over, and generally parallel to, theforks 16 and perpendicular to thefirst section 1104A and themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. The first and 1152, 1154 may extend generally vertically and may be generally parallel to thesecond coupling plates main body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. As shown inFIGS. 1B and18 , acover 1288 may optionally be placed over theadapter 1150 and may extend from thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102 to cover the first and 1152, 1154. Thesecond coupling plates cover 1288 may be formed from a flexible, polymeric material. - With reference to
FIGS. 19-23 , anotherexemplary adapter 2150 coupling abase mount 1102 to anupper boom portion 1104 of aboom assembly 1100 is described in detail. Theboom assembly 1100 may be substantially similar to theboom assembly 1100 shown inFIGS. 1B and15 , except as described herein. Theadapter 2150 comprises at least one coupling member that includes at least one bar. In the example shown, the at least one coupling member comprises afirst coupling bar 2152 and asecond coupling bar 2154 that are each coupled to anupper boom portion 1104 and abase mount 1102. Although two 2152, 2154 are shown, it should be understood that the at least one coupling member may include a single bar, e.g., one ofbars 2152 or 2154.bars - The first and
2152, 2154 may be substantially similar to each other and may each comprise a respectivesecond coupling bars 2156, 2160 that is coupled to theupper section upper boom portion 1104; a 2158, 2162 that is coupled to thelower section base mount 1102; and a 2170, 2172 joining the upper andmiddle section 2156, 2158 and 2160, 2162. As shown inlower sections FIGS. 19 and21 , the upper and 2156, 2158 of thelower sections first coupling bar 2152 each comprise a respective first dimension or width W2156, W2158 and a second dimension or depth D2156, D2158, with the widths W2156, W2158 being substantially equal to each other and the depths D2156, D2158 being substantially equal to each other. Themiddle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152 comprises a width W2170 and a depth D2170, in which one or both of the width W2170 and the depth D2170 of themiddle section 2170 are reduced or decreased, as compared to the corresponding width W2156, W2158 and/or depth D2156, D2158 of the upper and 2156, 2158. In the example shown inlower sections FIG. 21 , themiddle section 2170 comprises a pair of uppercurved surfaces 2170A, a pair of lowercurved surfaces 2170B, and a pair of substantially planar middle surfaces 2170C (only one of each of the upper and lower 2170A, 2170B and the substantially planar middle surface 2170C is labeled), in which the upper and lowercurved surfaces 2170A, 2170B curve continuously inward toward the substantially planar middle surfaces 2170C.curved surfaces - In examples, the first and
2152, 2154 may be formed from steel, have upper andsecond coupling bars 2156, 2158 each comprising a respective width W2156, W2158 from ½ inch to 2.0 inches, and a respective depth D2156, D2158 from 1/2 inch to 2.5 inches,lower sections 2170, 2172 each comprising a respective width W2170 from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch and a respective depth D2170 from 1/2 inch to 2.5 inches.middle sections - As shown in
FIG. 19 , the upper, lower, and 2160, 2162, 2172 of themiddle sections second coupling bar 2154 likewise each comprise a respective width W2160, W2162, W2172 and depth D2160, D2162, D2172, in which the widths W2160, W2162 of the upper and 2160, 2162 are substantially equal to each other; the depths D2160, D2162 of the upper andlower sections 2160, 2162 are substantially equal to each other; and one or both of the width W2172 and the depth D2172 of thelower sections middle section 2172 are reduced or decreased, as compared to the corresponding width W2160, W2162 and/or depth D2160, D2162 of the upper and 2160, 2162.lower sections - The
main body 1106 comprises a plurality ofapertures 2107 formed in the sides thereof, as shown inFIG. 19 . In the example shown, a right side of themain body 1106 comprises twoapertures 2107. Although not visible, a left side of themain body 1106 also comprises two apertures. The 2158, 2162 of the first andlower sections 2152, 2154 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 2158-1, 2162-1 extending through the depth D2158, D2162 of the respectivesecond coupling bars 2158, 2162. The first andlower sections 2152, 2154 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside thesecond coupling bars main body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. To secure theadapter 2150, specifically the first and 2152, 2154 of thesecond coupling bars adapter 2150, to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102, the 2158, 2162 of each of the first andlower section 2152, 2154 may be inserted into thesecond coupling bars base mount 1102 so that the 2158, 2162 are received in thelower sections main body 1106 and the apertures 2158-1, 2162-1 formed in the 2158, 2162 of the first andlower sections 2152, 2154 are aligned with thesecond coupling bars apertures 2107 formed in themain body 1106, as shown inFIG. 19 .Fasteners 2104 extend through theapertures 2107 formed in the right side of themain body 1106 and are received in the apertures 2162-1 formed in thelower section 2162 of thesecond coupling bar 2154.Fasteners 2104 similarly extend through the apertures (not visible) formed in the left side of themain body 1106 and are received in the apertures 2158-1 formed in thelower section 2158 of thefirst coupling bar 2152. Washers (not labeled) may be positioned between thefasteners 2104 and themain body 1106. When the first and 2152, 2154 are installed in thesecond coupling bars main body 1106 of thebase mount 1102, the 2156, 2160 and theupper sections 2170, 2172 extend above themiddle sections main body 1106, as shown inFIGS. 19 and20 . - The
upper boom portion 1104 may be coupled to theadapter 2150. As shown inFIGS. 1B and20 , theupper boom portion 1104 may comprise afirst section 1104A and asecond section 1104B. A connector 2164 provides a transition between the generally rectangular cross-section of themain body 1106 to the generally circular cross-section of theupper boom portion 1104. Theconnector 1164 shown inFIG. 20 , which may be substantially similar to theconnector 1164 shown inFIG. 15 , may be positioned between theadapter 2150 and theupper boom portion 1104 and comprises alower element 1166 having a cross-sectional shape (i.e., generally rectangular) and dimensions that mirror the cross-sectional shape and dimensions of themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. Thelower element 1166 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to a lower surface (not visible) of anadapter plate 1168, and thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 is coupled, e.g., via welding, to an upper surface 1168-1 of theadapter plate 1168 opposite the lower surface.Gussets 1174 may be coupled, e.g., via welding, to thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 and may be further coupled, e.g., via welding, to the upper surface 1168-1 of theadapter plate 1168. - With continued reference to
FIG. 20 , thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 comprises a plurality ofapertures 2105 formed in the sides thereof. In the example shown, a right side of thelower element 1166 comprises twoapertures 2105. Although not visible, a left side of thelower element 1166 also comprises two apertures. The 2156, 2160 of the first andupper sections 2152, 2154 each comprise a plurality of corresponding threaded apertures 2156-1, 2160-1 extending through the depth D2156, D2160 (not labeled insecond coupling bars FIG. 20 ; seeFIG. 19 ) of the respective 2156, 2160. The first andupper sections 2152, 2154 may be configured, i.e., sized and shaped, to fit and be received inside thesecond coupling bars lower element 1166 of theconnector 1164. To secure theupper boom portion 1104 to theadapter 2150, specifically to the first and 2152, 2154 of thesecond coupling bars adapter 2150, thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 may be placed over the 2156, 2160 of the first andupper sections 2152, 2154 and positioned so that thesecond coupling bars 2156, 2160 are received in theupper sections lower element 1166 and the apertures 2156-1, 2160-1 formed in the first and 2152, 2154 are aligned with thesecond coupling bars apertures 2105 formed in thelower element 1166.Fasteners 2206 extend through theapertures 2105 formed in the right side of thelower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 2160-1 formed in theupper section 2160 of thesecond coupling bar 2154.Fasteners 2206 similarly extend through apertures (not visible) formed in the left side of thelower element 1166 and are received in the apertures 2156-1 formed in theupper section 2156 of thefirst coupling bar 2152. Washers (not labeled) may be positioned between thefasteners 2206 and thelower element 1166. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 1B ,22 , and39 , upon coupling of theupper boom portion 1104 to theadapter 1150 and when theadapter 2150 is in a normal operating position (i.e., prior to failure as described herein), the first and 2152, 2154 may extend generally vertically and may be generally parallel to thesecond coupling bars main body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. As shown inFIGS. 1B and23 , acover 1288 may optionally be placed over theadapter 2150 and may extend from thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102 to cover the first and 2152, 2154.second coupling bars - With reference to
FIGS. 1A ,1B ,24, and 25 , theaccessory 300 may be coupled to a distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the 104, 1104 prior to, or after, coupling of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 to theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150. Theadapter accessory 300 may be coupled to the distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the 104, 1104 via any suitable attachment or attaching means (not shown), such as anupper boom portion adapter bracket 302 as shown inFIGS. 24 and 25 . Theaccessory 300 may also be coupled to the distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the 104, 1104, e.g., via a threaded opening in theupper boom portion 104, 1104 that receives theupper boom portion accessory 300, etc. In some examples, theaccessory 300 may be wireless and may comprise a battery or other power source. In other examples, wiring (not shown) may extend from thetruck 10 through the 100, 1100 to theboom assembly accessory 300, e.g., to provide theaccessory 300 with power and/or to send data to and receive data from theaccessory 300. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 24 and 25 , theaccessory 300 is coupled to the 104, 1104 via an adapter bracket 302 (an outline of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 is shown with dashed lines inupper boom portion FIG. 24 to illustrate internal components). The distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the 104, 1104 may comprise aupper boom portion receiver 320 that is configured to secure theadapter bracket 302 to the 104, 1104. Theupper boom portion adapter bracket 302 comprises aflange 304 that is seated against thereceiver 320 when theadapter bracket 302 is installed. Anopening 306 in theflange 304 includesslots 308 through whichfasteners 310 extend and are received in threadedapertures 321 formed in thereceiver 320. Thereceiver 320 may comprise anopening 322, such that any wiring (not shown) may extend from thetruck 10 through the 100, 1100 and through theboom assembly 322, 306 to theopenings accessory 300. - After the
adapter bracket 302 is coupled to the distal end 104-1, 1104-1 of the 104, 1104, theupper boom portion accessory 300 may be coupled to theadapter bracket 302. Theadapter bracket 302 comprises acompartment 312 that is defined by theflange 304, 314, 316, and anside walls end wall 318. One of theside walls 316 comprises anopening 317 through which afastener 324 extends and is received in a threadedaperture 301 formed in ahousing 326 of theaccessory 300. A washer (not labeled) may be positioned between thefastener 324 and theside wall 316. Aspacer 328 may be placed between the accessory 300 and an inner surface (not visible) of theside wall 316 to maintain a desired positioning of theaccessory 300 within thecompartment 312 and to prevent the accessory 300 from moving during operation. After theaccessory 300 is coupled to theadapter bracket 302, theaccessory 300 is received in thecompartment 312, and theflange 304, 314, 316, and endside walls wall 318 at least partially enclose and protect theaccessory 300. - As shown in
FIG. 39 , a length L1 of the 104A, 1104A of thefirst section 104, 1104 and/or a length L3 of theupper boom portion 106, 1106 of themain body 102, 1102 may be adjusted or configured as desired to place thebase mount accessory 300 at a desired vertical distance D1 above theforks 16 so that theaccessory 300 may perform the desired functions without interfering with the operator or loading of items on theforks 16. A length L2 of the 104B, 1104B of thesecond section 104, 1104 may also be adjusted or configured as desired to obtain a desired horizontal placement or positioning of theupper boom portion accessory 300, i.e., a distance D2 between the operator'sbackrest 34 or theload backrest 20 and theaccessory 300. In particular, the location of the 106, 1106 and themain body 104, 1104 and/or the length L2 of theupper boom portion 104B, 1104B may be configured to position the accessory 300: (i) generally centered over thesecond section forks 16, (ii) laterally along axis c so as to be near or directly over one of theforks 16, and/or (iii) outside of the load handling/fork area. In some examples, theaccessory 300 may be a camera. A pallet (not shown) may be placed on theforks 16, and the 100, 1100 may position the camera above and over theboom assembly forks 16 so that the camera may monitor and track items that are loaded onto the pallet. In other examples, theaccessory 300 may be an image projecting device, and the 100, 1100 may position the image projecting device above and over theboom assembly forks 16 so that the device may project an image at a desired location on theforks 16 or a pallet placed on theforks 16. Although the structure depicted inFIG. 39 resembles theboom assembly 1100 ofFIG. 1B , reference numerals for analogous components of theboom assembly 100 ofFIG. 1A are included. - Because the
100, 1100 as described herein may extend generally vertically above the operator'sboom assembly platform 32 and generally horizontally over theforks 16, the 100, 1100 is subjected to a variety of standard application forces during normal operation of theboom assembly truck 10, including acceleration, braking, turning, and loading/unloading. The 100, 1100 may be subjected to additional forces, such as when theboom assembly 100, 1100 collides with an object (e.g., an overhead object, a falling object, etc. (not shown)) and/or theboom assembly truck 10 collides with another object, such as another truck, a rack, etc. (not shown). As shown inFIG. 40 , when the 104, 1104 collides with an object, theupper boom portion 100, 1100 may be subjected to forces directly incident on theboom assembly 104, 1104 at any angle, such as exemplary external force F1 or force F2. The external forces F1, F2 may have force components coincident or parallel with a horizontal axis h, a vertical axis v, and/or an out-of-plane axis c, which axes are shown inupper boom portion FIGS. 1A and1B . Although the structure depicted inFIG. 40 resembles theboom assembly 1100 ofFIG. 1B , reference numerals for analogous components of theboom assembly 100 ofFIG. 1A are included. - With continued reference to
FIG. 40 , the external force F1 may be caused by an object engaging/striking afirst wall 104A-1, 1104A-1 of the 104A, 1104A of thefirst section 104, 1104, whichupper boom portion first wall 104A-1, 1104A-1 faces away from theforks 16. The force F1 may strike thefirst wall 104A-1, 1104A-1 at an angle, such that the force F1 may have horizontal and vertical force components, as indicated by line h and line v, respectively. This force F1 may cause the 100, 1100 to bend in aboom assembly bending direction 250 toward the forks 16 (also referred to herein as a first bending direction). - Alternatively, with continued reference to
FIG. 40 , the 104, 1104 may be subjected to a different external force, such as the force F2, caused by an object acting on aupper boom portion second wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 of the 104A, 1104A of thefirst section 104, 1104, whichupper boom portion second wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 faces toward theforks 16, and/or acting on theadapter bracket 302, e.g., on the end wall 318 (seeFIG. 26 ) of theadapter bracket 302 that extends substantially parallel to thesecond wall 104A-2, 1104A-2. The force F2 may comprise a normal force acting on thesecond wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 of the 104A, 1104A of thefirst section 104, 1104 or on theupper boom portion adapter bracket 302. This force F2 may cause the 100, 1100 to bend in aboom assembly bending direction 252 toward the power unit 14 (also referred to herein as a second direction). - Without the
150, 1150, 2150 in accordance with the present disclosure, these external forces F1 or F2 may generate stresses on theadapter 100, 1100, the operator'sboom assembly backrest 34, and other components of thetruck 10 that may cause damage or failure in structural integrity, such as permanent deformation, cracking, shearing, or other type(s) of failure. As shown inFIGS. 1A ,1B , and40 , the 150, 1150, 2150 is configured to maintain theadapter 100, 1100 in a normal (e.g., upright) operating position when theboom assembly 104, 1104 is subjected to standard application forces during normal operation of theupper boom portion truck 10, i.e., when the 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces causing one or more internal forces or stresses in theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150, or at least one coupling member thereof, that are below the yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof. In other words, theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 is configured to maintain theadapter 100, 1100 in the normal operating position when theboom assembly 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield. Theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 is further configured to yield or fail in a controlled manner, as shown inadapter FIGS. 26-38 , when the 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces causing one or more internal forces or stresses in theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150, or at least one coupling member thereof, equal to, or in excess of, the yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof. In other words, theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 is configured to yield when theadapter 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that theadapter 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102, as described herein. The yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of thebase mount 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof may be designed so that theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 or coupling member yields or fails before one or more external forces applied to theadapter 104, 1104 cause stresses in the operator'supper boom portion backrest 34 sufficient to result in damage or failure in the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34. Hence, the yield force threshold or the yield stress threshold of the 150, 1150, 2150 or at least one coupling member thereof may be designed so that theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 yields or fails before the one or more external forces applied to theadapter 104, 1104 cause an element or component of theupper boom portion truck 10, i.e., the operator'sbackrest 34, to which theboom assembly 100 is coupled, to fail. Theboom assembly 100 is considered to comprise the structure, e.g., first and 116A, 116B and the first andsecond brackets 108A, 108B, for coupling thesecond flanges 102, 1102 to thebase mount truck 10. - With reference to
FIG. 40 , when a force, such as exemplary force F2, acts on thesecond wall 104A-2, 1104A-2, a moment M2 of the force F2 equals a magnitude of the force F2 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h; seeFIG. 1 ) times a length LM2 extending from where the force F2 impacts or is applied to thesecond wall 104A-2, 1104A-2 to a location anywhere on the operator's backrest 34 (as the 102, 1102 is coupled to the operator's backrest 34), such as where the first andbase mount 108A, 108B (not visible insecond flanges FIG. 40 ; seeFIG. 2 ) are coupled to the operator'sbackrest 34. The operator'sbackrest 34 will experience substantial bending stress from the moment M2. A geometry of, and material used for, the 106, 1106 of themain body 102, 1102 andbase mount 104, 1104 are generally selected so that theupper boom portion 106, 1106 and themain body 104, 1104 have a high section modulus to withstand impact forces. Hence, when a force, such as force F2, acts on theupper boom portion 100, 1100, stresses on theboom assembly 100, 1100 and the operator'sboom assembly backrest 34 resulting from the force F2 and its corresponding moment M2 are more likely to cause damage to the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34 than the 100, 1100. Accordingly, a yield force or yield stress threshold for failure of the operator'sboom assembly backrest 34 will be determined, which may be used to determine a yield force threshold for the each of the first andsecond pins 180, 182 (seeFIG. 7 ) and a yield stress threshold for each of thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 (seeFIG. 16 ) orcoupling bars 2152, 2154 (seeFIG. 22 ). - With reference to
FIG. 41 , in all examples of the 150, 1150, 2150, it may be presumed that a force FH1 is applied at a height above theadapter forks 16 and the operator'splatform 32, which height is slightly above an operator height H2 for a 95th percentile adult male, seeFIG. 39 . An internal moment MH1 from the force FH1 is developed within the operator'sbackrest 34, which equals a magnitude of the force FH1 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times a length LH1 extending from where the force FH1 impacts or is applied to the 104, 1104 to a given location on the operator'supper boom portion backrest 34, which given location on the operator'sbackrest 34 may extend from a lowermost point PL on the operator'sbackrest 34 to an uppermost point Pu on the operator'sbackrest 34, seeFIG. 41 . -
- where σ = bending stress;
- MH1 = moment; and
- Z = section modulus based on a geometry of the operator's
backrest 34. - Equation (1) may be solved for various values of moment MH1i, in which i = 1... n, in which each moment MH1i has a corresponding moment arm defined by a length LH1i, in which i = 1...n, in which LH1i may be any length extending from where the force FH1 impacts or is applied to the
104, 1104 to an end point at or between the lowermost point PL of the operator's backrest 34 (illustrated as LH1L inupper boom portion FIG. 41 ) and the uppermost point Pu of the operator's backrest 34 (illustrated as LH1U inFIG. 41 ). Bending stress σ may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which the operator'sbackrest 34 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel from which the operator'sbackrest 34 is formed. Yield strengths for such materials are well known. The section modulus Z can be calculated from the geometry of the operator'sbackrest 34 and may vary with height depending on backrest geometry, as section modulus Z may change along a height of the operator'sbackrest 34, i.e., a section modulus Z calculated for a backrest horizontal plane taken at one point along the height of the operator'sbackrest 34 may vary from a section modulus Z calculated for a backrest horizontal plane taken at a different point along the height of the operator'sbackrest 34. That is, the section modulus Z may have one value when the moment arm defined by the length LH1L has an end point positioned at the lowermost point PL of the operator'sbackrest 34, as the cross-section of the geometry at the lowermost point PL of the operator'sbackrest 34 will be used when calculating the section modulus Z, and the section modulus Z may have another value when the moment arm defined by the length LH1U has an end point positioned at the uppermost point Pu of the operator'sbackrest 34, as the cross-section of the geometry at the uppermost point Pu of the operator'sbackrest 34 will be used when calculating the section modulus Z, which may differ from the cross-section taken at the lowermost point PL of the operator'sbackrest 34. Setting the bending stress σ equal to the yield strength of the material from which the operator'sbackrest 34 is formed allows a moment MH1i at each determined section modulus Z to be calculated that would result in the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34 being damaged, see Equation (1) above. Each section modulus Z may be located at a different height along the operator'sbackrest 34 such that each calculated moment MM1i with a different, corresponding section modulus Z may have a different moment arm or length LH1i. The yield strength also defines a yield stress threshold for the operator'sbackrest 34. In other words, the force FH1 resulting in the moment MH1 will create stresses in the operator'sbackrest 34 equal to the yield stress threshold for the operator'sbackrest 34, resulting in structural integrity damage to the operator'sbackrest 34. - The moment MH1i having the lowest value from all values of the moment MH1i calculated, which equals the smallest moment MH1i to cause damage to the operator's
backrest 34, is designated as a minimum moment value MH1Min. Once the minimum moment MH1Min is known, a magnitude of a corresponding force FH1Min may be determined, which force FH1Min is likely to cause structural integrity damage to the operator'sbackrest 34. The force FH1Min may be determined by dividing the moment MH1Min by a length corresponding to moment MH1Min, e.g., the length corresponding to the section modulus Z corresponding to and from which moment MH1Min was determined. It is desirable to have each of thepins 180, 182 (seeFIG. 3 ), thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 (seeFIGS. 4 and5 ), or thebars 2152, 2154 (seeFIG. 6 ) fail prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator'sbackrest 34. Hence, the force FH1Min may be multiplied by a safety factor, such as 0.5 or any other value desired to calculate a modified force FM. - With reference to the
adapter 150 illustrated inFIGS. 7-13 , the force FH1Min is applied to a section of theupper boom portion 104 overlapping or overlying one of the upper engagement plates 154-1, as illustrated inFIGS. 41 and42 , which location where the force FH1Min is applied is spaced a distance from thefirst pin 180 equal to length LM. Using the modified force FM instead of the force FH1Min, a moment MFM of the modified force FM about thefirst pin 180 equals a magnitude of the modified force FM (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times the length LM extending from where the modified force FM impacts or is applied to theupper boom portion 104/upper engagement plate 154-1 to a location of thefirst pin 180. Application of the modified force FM causes an internal shear force FS to be applied by thehinge barrel 164 coupled to theupper support body 156 sufficient to shear thefirst pin 180. A moment MS of the shear force FS about thesecond pin 182 equals the magnitude of the shear force FS times a length L180 extending from where the force FS impacts or is applied to thefirst pin 180 to a location of thesecond pin 182 about which the sheer force FS will rotate. -
-
- Values of shear strength V for various materials are well known. Various combinations of shear strength V and cross-sectional area APIN for each of the first and
180, 182 may be substituted into Equation (3). Shear force FS sufficient to shear the first orsecond pins 180, 182 is known from solving Equation (2) and is referred to herein as: (i) a shear force threshold for each of the first andsecond pin 180, 182; and (ii) the yield stress threshold for thesecond pins adapter 150. Preferably, a large cross-sectional area APIN is selected for the first and 180, 182 to account for degrading effects of repeated application-induced stresses or fatigue at the first andsecond pins 180, 182. Hence, the shear force threshold for each of the first andsecond pins 180, 182 separately or the yield stress threshold for thesecond pin adapter 150 is designed so that the first and 180, 182 fail prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator'ssecond pins backrest 34. - It is further contemplated that the shear force threshold for each of the
180, 182 may be designed via experimentation using actual boom assemblies (e.g., by applying one or more external forces to actual boom assemblies to allow each of thepins 180, 182 to be designed so that eachpins 180, 182 yields or fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34). Hence, thepin 180, 182 are designed so that when one or more external forces are applied to a boom assembly sufficient to cause internal stresses in each of thepins 180, 182 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of eachpins 180, 182, thepin 180, 182 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest. Thepin 180, 182 may also be designed via one or more suitable computer modelling techniques such that each of thepins 180, 182 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest.pins - With reference to
FIGS. 26-28 and40 , theupper boom portion 104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F1, at an angle to thefirst wall 104A-1 of theupper boom portion 104 and generally extending toward theforks 16. When a horizontal component of the external force F1 (indicated by line h) creates one or more internal forces within theadapter 150 equal to or in excess of the yield force threshold of theadapter 150, theadapter 150 yields or fails, and theupper element 152 of theadapter 150, along with theupper boom portion 104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward the forks 16 (referred to herein as a first shear state). The yield force threshold of theadapter 150 may equal the shear force threshold for each of the first and 180, 182.second pins - As the
upper element 152 begins to displace or bend due to the external force F1 acting on thefirst wall 104A-1 of theupper boom portion 104, thehinge barrel 164 coupled to theupper support body 156 exerts an internal shear force on thefirst pin 180 due to theupper support body 156 bending or rotating with theupper boom portion 104. Thefirst pin 180 may be a shear pin that is comprised of one or more materials and may have a structure/geometry, such that the first pin 180 (also referred to herein as a first shear pin) has a shear force threshold or yield force threshold, as discussed above. Thefirst pin 180 may resist rotation of theupper element 152 in thefirst bending direction 250, and prior to breaking, thefirst pin 180 may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of theupper boom portion 104. When theupper boom portion 104 is subjected to the external force F1 having a sufficient magnitude to cause one or more internal forces in theadapter 150 to equal or exceed the yield force threshold of theadapter 150, i.e., the external force F1 on theupper boom portion 104 causes thehinge barrel 164 to create an internal shear force on thefirst pin 180 equal to or in excess of the shear force threshold or yield force threshold of thefirst pin 180, thefirst pin 180 is caused to break or be sheared apart and fail, as indicated by broken pin 180' inFIG. 27 . Thefirst pin 180 may break at a location(s) positioned adjacent to thehinge barrel 164. Thus, thefirst pin 180 fails before one or more external forces applied to theupper boom portion 104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34. - As shown in
FIGS. 27 and28 , after thefirst pin 180 breaks, theupper element 152 rotates relative to thelower element 158 about an axis A1 of thesecond pin 182 in thefirst bending direction 250 toward theforks 16. Thefirst gas spring 176 acts as a dampener and provides resistance to rotation of theupper element 152 in thefirst bending direction 250. As the first extension 156-1 rotates with theupper support body 156, thefirst arm 172 is held in place by (i) engagement between the linear section 172-1 and thefirst stop 186; and (ii) a remaining portion of the broken pin 180' in engagement with one of the hinge barrels 168 and the aperture of thefirst arm 172, causing thefirst gas spring 176 to be compressed between the first extension 156-1 and the first end 172-2 of thefirst arm 172. Fluid, such as a gas comprising air, within a cylinder (not labeled) of thefirst gas spring 176 resists the compression caused by a piston or ram moving into the cylinder, such that thefirst gas spring 176 absorbs at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of theupper boom portion 104. Thefirst gas spring 176 helps to slow and eventually stop the motion of theupper boom portion 104 and helps to control deflection of theupper boom portion 104 when theboom assembly 100 enters the first shear state. The amount of resistance provided by thefirst gas spring 176 may be selected as desired depending upon the type, size, etc. of gas spring provided. - When the
upper element 152 moves in thefirst bending direction 250, the second extension 156-2 also rotates with theupper support body 156, and thesecond arm 174 and thesecond gas spring 178 rotate freely about the axis A1 of thesecond pin 182, in which thesecond pin 182 remains intact. As shown inFIG. 28 , the linear section 174-1 of thesecond arm 174 disengages and moves away from thesecond stop 188. Theadapter 150 is configured such that theupper boom portion 104 remains connected to thebase mount 102 after thefirst pin 180 fails. In particular, theupper element 152, and theupper boom portion 104 coupled thereto, remain connected or attached to thelower element 158 via thesecond gas spring 178, thesecond arm 174, and thesecond pin 182 in engagement with the respective hinge barrels 166, 170 of the upper and 156, 162, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to thelower support bodies truck 10, thebase mount 102 and theupper boom portion 104, theaccessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects. - With reference to
FIGS. 29 ,30 , and40 , theupper boom portion 104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F2, in a direction generally toward thepower unit 14. When the force F2 acting on theupper boom portion 104 creates one or more internal forces within theadapter 150 equal to or in excess of the yield force threshold of theadapter 150, theadapter 150 yields or fails, causing theupper element 152 of theadapter 150, along with theupper boom portion 104 coupled thereto, to be displaced toward the power unit 14 (referred to herein as a second shear state). - As the
upper element 152 begins to displace or bend due to the external force F2, thehinge barrel 166 coupled to theupper support body 156 exerts an internal shear force on thesecond pin 182 due to theupper support body 156 bending or rotating with theupper boom portion 104. Thesecond pin 182 may comprise a shear pin, and as described above with respect to thefirst pin 180 inFIGS. 27 and28 , the second pin 182 (also referred to herein as a second shear pin) may have a shear force threshold or yield force threshold, see Equations (2) and (3), determined by the one or more materials comprising thesecond pin 182 and/or a structure/geometry of thesecond pin 182. Thesecond pin 182 may resist rotation of theupper element 152 in thesecond bending direction 252, and prior to breaking, thesecond pin 182 may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of theupper boom portion 104. When theupper boom portion 104 is subjected to the external force F2 having a sufficient magnitude to cause one or more internal forces in theadapter 150 to equal or exceed the yield force threshold of theadapter 150, i.e., the external force F2 acting on theupper boom portion 104 causes thehinge barrel 166 to create an internal shear force on thesecond pin 182 equal to or in excess of the shear force threshold or yield force threshold of thesecond pin 182, thesecond pin 182 is caused to break or be sheared apart and fail, as indicated by broken pin 182' inFIG. 30 . Thesecond pin 182 may break at a location(s) positioned adjacent to thehinge barrel 170. Thus, thesecond pin 182 fails before one or more external forces applied to the upper boom portion cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34. - After the
second pin 182 breaks, theupper element 152 then rotates relative to thelower element 158 about an axis A2 of thefirst pin 180 in thesecond bending direction 252 toward thepower unit 14. As described above with respect to thefirst gas spring 176, thesecond gas spring 178 acts as a dampener and provides resistance to rotation of theupper element 152 in thesecond bending direction 252. As the second extension 156-2 rotates with theupper support body 156, thesecond arm 174 is held in place by (i) engagement between the linear section 174-1 and thesecond stop 188; and (ii) a remaining portion of the broken pin 182' in engagement with one of the hinge barrels 170 and the aperture of thesecond arm 174, causing thesecond gas spring 178 to be compressed between the second extension 156-2 and the first end 174-2 of thesecond arm 174. Fluid, such as a gas comprising air, within a cylinder (not labeled) of thefirst gas spring 176 resists the compression caused by a piston or ram moving into the cylinder, such that thesecond gas spring 178 absorbs at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact and displacement of theupper boom portion 104. Thesecond gas spring 178 helps to slow and eventually stop the motion of theupper boom portion 104 and helps to control deflection of theupper boom portion 104 of theboom assembly 100 when theboom assembly 100 enters the second shear state. The amount of resistance provided by thesecond gas spring 178 may be selected as desired depending upon the type, size, etc. of gas spring provided. - When the
upper element 152 moves in thesecond bending direction 252, the first extension 156-1 also rotates with theupper support body 156, and thefirst arm 172 and thesecond gas spring 178 rotate freely about the axis A2 of thefirst pin 180, in which thesecond pin 182 remains intact. As shown inFIG. 30 , the linear section 172-1 of thefirst arm 172 disengages and moves away from thefirst stop 186. Theadapter 150 is configured such that theupper boom portion 104 remains connected to thebase mount 102 after thesecond pin 182 fails. In particular, theupper element 152, and theupper boom portion 104 coupled thereto, remain attached to thelower element 158 via thefirst gas spring 176, thefirst arm 172, and thefirst pin 180, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to thetruck 10, thebase mount 102 andupper boom portion 104, theaccessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects. - With reference to the
adapter 1150 illustrated inFIGS. 16 and17 , the force FH1Min may be applied to a section of theupper boom portion 1104, specifically to a section of theconnector 1164, which location where the force FH1Min is applied is spaced a distance from a top of an unsupported coupling plate section, i.e., a respective location 1152-1, 1154-1 at which the first and 1152, 1154 extend beyond the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160, which distance from where the force FH1Min is applied to the respective location 1152-1, 1154-1 is equal to length LM1, as shown insecond coupling plates FIG. 41 ,43 , and45 . Using the modified force FM1 instead of the force FH1Min, a moment MFM1 of the modified force FM1 about an axis AM1 at one of (or at a point midway between) the locations 1152-2, 1154-2, where the first and 1152, 1154 andsecond coupling plates upper end portions 1158A, 1162A of the first and second lower plate mounts 1158, 1162 meet equals a magnitude of the modified force FM1 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times the length LM1 plus a length D1152 or D1154 extending from where the modified force FM1 impacts or is applied to theupper boom portion 1104/connector 1164 to a location on one of (or at a point midway between) the locations 1152-2, 1154-2. -
- Where:
and
D is the length of an unsupported distance D1152 of thefirst coupling plate 1152 between the first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158 or the length of an unsupported distance D1154 of thesecond coupling plate 1154 between the second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162. Hence D = D1152; D = D1154; and D1152 = D1154. Length D is selected so that the 1152 and 1154 have sufficient length to bend without fracturing or cracking.coupling plates - LM1 is a lever arm distance from the impact force FM1 to one of (or a point midway between) the locations 1152-1, 1154-1, where the first and
1152, 1154 and lower end portions 1156A, 1160A of the first and second upper plate mounts 1156, 1160 meet.second coupling plates -
-
- X is a distance between the first and
1152, 1154 in a direction parallel to the h axis. Distance X is selected so that the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 do not contact during bending.second coupling plates - LM1 is a lever arm distance from the impact force FM1 to one of (or a point midway between) the locations 1152-1, 1154-1.
- D is the length of an unsupported distance D1152 of the
first coupling plate 1152 between the first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158 or the length of an unsupported distance D1154 of thesecond coupling plate 1154 between the second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162. - Aplate is the cross-sectional area of each of the first and
1152, 1154, i.e., determined by multiplying a first dimension T1152 times a second dimension W1152, seesecond coupling plates FIG. 44 , in which only the dimensions T1152 and W1152 are illustrated for thefirst coupling plate 1152. However,plate 1154, in the illustrated embodiment, has the same cross section and, hence, the same dimensions T1152 and W1152. - DF = moment distribution factor having a value between 0 and 1 and, in the illustrated embodiment, equals 0.5 since both
1152, 1154 are identical.coupling plates - Z= a section modulus for each of the
1152, 1154, which can be determined based on the geometry of eachcoupling plates 1152, 1154.plate - The total stresses σtotal occurring within each one of the
1152, 1154 when the modified force FM1 impacts on thecoupling plates upper boom portion 1104/theconnector 1164 may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which each of the 1152, 1154 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel. Yield strengths for such materials are well known. When the total stresses σtotal occurring in each one of thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 equals the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 is formed, eachcoupling plate 1152, 1154 will fail or yield, i.e., permanently deform or bend. The yield strength σyield strength of the material from which eachcoupling plate 1152, 1154 is formed is equal to a yield stress threshold for eachcoupling plate 1152, 1154. Setting total stresses σtotal equal to the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which theplate 1152, 1154 is formed may be expressed by the following Equation (6):coupling plate -
- As noted above,
coupling plate 1154, in the illustrated embodiment, has the same cross section ascoupling plate 1152 and, hence, the same dimensions T1152 and W1152. Accordingly, Equation (7) may also be used to determine Z for thecoupling plate 1154. As noted above, length D is selected so that the 1152, 1154 bend and do not fracture and distance X is selected so that thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 do not contact during bending. As also noted above, the cross-sectional area Aplate of each of thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 may be determined by multiplying the first dimension T1152 times the second dimension W1152. As the distance X increases, an overall stiffness of the coupling element (i.e., the first andplates second coupling plates 1152, 1154) increases, i.e., an amount of force necessary to bend the 1152, 1154 increases. Hence, various combinations of the first dimension T1152, the cross-sectional area Aplate (T1152 * W1152) for eachcoupling plates 1152, 1154, and the distance X may be substituted into Equations (6) and (7) and appropriate values for the first and second dimensions T1152 and W1152 and, hence, the cross sectional area Aplate and the distance X are selected. Preferably, the cross sectional area Aplate is selected to be sufficiently large to minimize deflection of thecoupling plate upper boom portion 1104 and maximize resiliency to prevent fatigue of the first and 1152, 1154. Using Equations (6) and (7), eachsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 is designed so that thecoupling plate 1152, 1154 fails when the modified force FM1 is applied to thecoupling plate upper boom portion 1104/theconnector 1164 at the location illustrated inFIGS. 41 ,43 , and45 , or a moment is generated by a force F applied anywhere along theupper boom portion 1104 and having a moment arm extending to any location on thebackrest 34, in which the moment generated by that force F is equal to or greater than the moment MFM1. Hence, both 1152, 1154 will fail or yield prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator'scoupling plates backrest 34. - Determining the modified force FM1 and the corresponding moment MFM1 may be found using finite element analysis methods so as to allow the first and second dimensions T1152 and W1152 and the cross sectional area Aplate and the distance X to be calculated from Equations (4) and (5).
- It is further contemplated that the yield stress threshold for each of the
1152, 1154 may be designed via experimentation using actual boom assemblies (e.g., by applying one or more external forces to actual boom assemblies to allow each of thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 to be designed so that eachcoupling plates 1152, 1154 yields or fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34). Hence, thecoupling plate 1152, 1154 are designed so that when one or more external forces are applied to a boom assembly sufficient to cause internal stresses in each of thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of eachcoupling plates 1152, 1154, thecoupling plate 1152, 1154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest. Thecoupling plate 1152, 1154 may also be designed via one or more suitable computer modelling techniques such that each of thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest or any other element of thecoupling plates truck 10. - As shown in
FIG. 40 , theupper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F1, at an angle to thefirst wall 1104A-1 of theupper boom portion 1104 and generally extending toward theforks 16. When a horizontal component of the external force F1 (indicated by line h) acting on thefirst wall 1104A-1 of theupper boom portion 1104 creates internal stresses in the first and 1152, 1154, equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold, i.e., the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which eachsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 is formed, thecoupling plate adapter 1150 yields or fails, and theconnector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward the forks 16 (referred to herein as a first failed state), as shown inFIGS. 31 and32 . In other words, application of the external force F1 to theupper boom portion 1104 causes displacement of theconnector 1164 in thefirst bending direction 250, and when the magnitude of the external force F1 is sufficient to cause internal stresses in each of the first and 1152, 1154 to equal or exceed the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling plates second coupling plates 1152, 1154 (i.e., the external force F1 on theupper boom portion 1104 causes theconnector 1164 to create stresses in each of the first and 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of a yield stress threshold of each first andsecond coupling plates second coupling plates 1152, 1154), the first and 1152, 1154 fail and begin to plastically deform, i.e., bend, in thesecond coupling plates first bending direction 250, as indicated by bent first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' inFIG. 32 . The first and 1152, 1154 bend about an axis (not shown) that is parallel to axis c (seesecond coupling plates FIG. 31 ). - A yield stress threshold of the
adapter 1150 may equal the yield stress threshold for each of first and 1152, 1154, i.e., the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which eachsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 is formed. Failure and deformation of the first andcoupling plate 1152, 1154 allows thesecond coupling plates connector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, to rotate or be displaced in thefirst bending direction 250, i.e., toward the forks 16 (inFIG. 32 , theupper boom portion 1104 is not shown (seeFIG. 31 ) and thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 is shown with dashed lines to illustrate the internal structure of the adapter 1150). The first and 1152, 1154 may be formed from the same material, e.g., a metal such as steel, and may have the same structure/geometry, such that the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 each have the same yield stress threshold. The first and second dimensions T1152 and W1152 and the cross sectional area Aplate of eachsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154, the distance X and the material from which each of thecoupling plate 1152, 1154 is formed, which material has a given yield strength σyield strength defining the yield stress threshold of each of the first andcoupling plates 1152, 1154, may be selected, such that the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 fail or yield before the one or more external forces applied to thesecond coupling plates upper boom portion 1104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34. Thus, the first and 1152, 1154 act as a moment limiter for the operator'ssecond coupling plates backrest 34 thereby ensuring that the 1152, 1154 fail prior to thecoupling plates backrest 34. - In examples, each
1152, 1154 may be formed from steel, have a first dimension T1152 of from about 1/8 inch to about 3/8 inch, a second dimension W1152 from about 2.0 inches to about 5.0 inches, a cross sectional area Aplate from about ¼ inch2 to about 1.875 inch2, a distance X between thecoupling plate 1152, 1154 from about 0.5 to about 2.0 inches, and a length D from about 3/8 inch to about 2.0 inches.coupling plates - The first and
1152, 1154 may plastically deform to allow controlled movement of thesecond coupling plates upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to thebase mount 1102, as shown inFIGS. 31 and32 . The second upper and lower plate mounts 1160, 1162 provide a first stop that limits rotation of theconnector 1164, and theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in thefirst bending direction 250. Theconnector 1164 is depicted inFIGS. 31 and32 as having rotated by about 45 degrees from a normal operating position with respect to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. A lower surface of the secondupper plate mount 1160 may comprise a chamferededge 1161, and an upper surface of the secondlower plate mount 1162 may comprise a correspondingchamfered edge 1163. If theconnector 1164 continues rotating in thefirst bending direction 250 beyond about 45 degrees, the chamferededge 1161 of the secondupper plate mount 1160 engages the chamferededge 1163 of the secondlower plate mount 1162, with engagement between the 1161, 1163 acting as the first stop to halt rotation of thechamfered edges connector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees. The first and 1152, 1154 may also be used with thesecond coupling plates base mount 1102 andupper boom portion 1104 described in detail with respect toFIGS. 36 and38 , in which a portion of thebase mount 1102 and theupper boom portion 1104 form first and second stops. - The first and
1152, 1154 may resist rotation of thesecond coupling plates connector 1164 in thefirst bending direction 250 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of theupper boom portion 1104. The amount of resistance provided by the first and 1152, 1154 may be selected based on the shape, geometry, and/or material of thesecond coupling plates 1152, 1154, as well as the configuration of theplates 1152, 1154 with respect to each other and/or with respect to the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 (e.g., distances X, D1152, and D1154, as described above). Thecoupling plates adapter 1150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F1, causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 resulting in plastic deformation of the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154, the plastically deformed first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 further hold thesecond coupling plates upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. As shown inFIG. 32 , the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' plastically deform/bend upon failure but typically do not break or fracture, such that the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' remain connected/attached toconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to thetruck 10, thebase mount 1102 and theupper boom portion 1104, theaccessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects. Even at very high magnitudes of the impact force F1 occurring at theupper boom portion 1104, both coupling plates 1152', 1154' will remain coupled to theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F1 moves over or past theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., theadapter 1150 is fixedly coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 via theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 and thebase mount 1102, as the coupling plates 1152', 1154' will yield or deflect before the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 and/or the coupling plates 1152', 1154' separate from one another or from theupper boom portion 1104 or thebase mount 1102. Further, the angle of deflection of the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' will stabilize at the final deformed angular position once the object imparting the impact force F1 is no longer in contact with theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' have sufficient rigidity that the weight of theupper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' after the impact force has been removed. Hence, the plastically deformed first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' hold theupper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which the plates 1152', 1154' are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., theupper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' do not further deform or move angularly relative to thebase mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. - As shown in
FIG. 40 , theupper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F2, in a direction generally toward thepower unit 14. When the force F2 acting on thesecond wall 1104A-2 of theupper boom portion 1104 creates one or more internal stresses in the first and 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154, thesecond coupling plates adapter 1150 yields or fails, and theconnector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward the power unit 14 (referred to herein as a second failed state), as shown inFIGS. 33 and34 . In other words, application of the external force F2 to theupper boom portion 1104 causes displacement of theconnector 1164 in thesecond bending direction 252, and when the magnitude of the external force F2 is sufficient to cause one or more internal stresses in each of the first and 1152, 1154 to equal or exceed the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling plates second coupling plates 1152, 1154 (i.e., the external force F2 on theupper boom portion 1104 causes theconnector 1164 to create stresses in each of the first and 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of a yield stress threshold of each first andsecond coupling plates second coupling plates 1152, 1154), the first and 1152, 1154 fail and begin to plastically deform, i.e., bend, in thesecond coupling plates second bending direction 252, as indicated by bent first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" inFIG. 34 . The first and 1152, 1154 bend about an axis (not shown) that is parallel to axis c (seesecond coupling plates FIG. 33 ). - A yield stress threshold of the
adapter 1150 may equal the yield stress threshold for each of first and 1152, 1154, i.e., the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which eachsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 is formed. Failure and deformation of the first andcoupling plate 1152, 1154 allows thesecond coupling plates connector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, to rotate or be displaced in thesecond bending direction 252, i.e., toward the power unit 14 (inFIG. 34 , theupper boom portion 1104 is not shown (seeFIG. 33 ), and thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 is shown with dashed lines to illustrate the internal structure of the adapter 1150). As described herein, the material(s) and/or structure/geometry of the first and 1152, 1154 may be selected so that the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 have a yield stress threshold that allows the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 to begin failing before the one or more external forces applied to thesecond coupling plates upper boom portion 1104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34, such that the first and 1152, 1154 act as a moment limiter for the operator'ssecond coupling plates backrest 34. - The first and
1152, 1154 may permanently and plastically deform to allow controlled movement of thesecond coupling plates upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to thebase mount 1102, as shown inFIGS. 33 and34 . The first upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1158 provide a second stop that limits rotation of theconnector 1164, and theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in thesecond bending direction 252. Theconnector 1164 inFIGS. 33 and34 is depicted as having rotated by about 45 degrees from a normal operating position with respect to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. A lower surface of the firstupper plate mount 1156 may comprise a chamferededge 1157, and an upper surface of the firstlower plate mount 1158 may comprise a correspondingchamfered edge 1159. If theconnector 1164 continues rotating in thesecond bending direction 252 beyond about 45 degrees, the chamferededge 1157 of the firstupper plate mount 1156 engages the chamferededge 1159 of the firstlower plate mount 1158, with engagement between the 1157, 1159 acting as the second stop to halt rotation of thechamfered edges connector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees. The first and 1152, 1154 may also be used with thesecond coupling plates base mount 1102 andupper boom portion 1104 described in detail with respect toFIGS. 36 and38 , in which a portion of thebase mount 1102 and theupper boom portion 1104 form first and second stops. - The first and
1152, 1154 may resist rotation of thesecond coupling plates connector 1164 in thesecond bending direction 252 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of theupper boom portion 1104. The amount of resistance provided by the first and 1152, 1154 may be selected based on the shape, geometry, and/or material selected forsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 and the configuration of thecoupling plates 1152, 1154 with respect to each other and/or with respect to the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162. Thecoupling plates adapter 1150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F2, causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and 1152, 1154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 resulting in plastic deformation of thesecond coupling plates 1152, 1154, the plastically deformed first andcoupling plates 1152, 1154 further hold thesecond coupling plates upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. As shown inFIG. 34 , the first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" plastically deform/bend upon failure but typically do not break or fracture, such that the first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" remain connected/attached toconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to thetruck 10, thebase mount 1102 and theupper boom portion 1104, theaccessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects. Even at very high magnitudes of the impact force F2 occurring at theupper boom portion 1104, bothcoupling plates 1152", 1154" will remain coupled to theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F2 moves over or past theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., theadapter 1150 is fixedly coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 via theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 and thebase mount 1102, as thecoupling plates 1152", 1154" will yield or deflect before the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 and/or thecoupling plates 1152", 1154" separate from one another or from theupper boom portion 1104 or thebase mount 1102. Further, the angle of deflection of the first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" will stabilize at the final deformation angle once the object imparting the impact force F2 is no longer in contact with theupper boom portion 104, i.e., the first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" have sufficient rigidity that the weight of theupper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" after the impact force has been removed. Hence, the plastically deformed first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" hold theupper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which theplates 1152", 1154" are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., theupper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" do not further deform or move angularly relative to thebase mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first andsecond coupling plates 1152", 1154" have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. - With reference to the
adapter 2150 illustrated inFIG. 22 , the force FH1Min corresponding to the moment MH1i having the lowest value from all values of the moment MH1i calculated is applied to a section of theupper boom portion 1104, specifically to a section of theconnector 1164, which location where the force FH1Min is applied is spaced a distance from an approximate center C2152, C2154 of the respective 2170, 2172 of the first andmiddle section 2152, 2154 equal to length LM1', as shown insecond coupling bars FIGS. 41 and46 . Using the modified force FM1 instead of the force FH1Min, which force FM1 is presumed to be applied at the same location on theupper boom portion 1104 as the force FH1Min, a moment MFM1 of the modified force FM1 about an axis passing through the center C2152, C2154 of the first and 2152, 2154 equals a magnitude of the modified force FM1 (i.e., its component parallel to the horizontal axis h) times the length LM1' extending from where the modified force FM1 impacts or is applied to thesecond coupling bars connector 1164 to the center C2152, C2154 of the first and 2152, 2154.second coupling bars - The total stresses σtotal occurring within each of the first and
2152, 2154, when the modified force FM1 is applied to thesecond coupling bars upper boom portion 1104/connector 1164 at the location illustrated inFIGS. 41 and46 , may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel. Yield strengths for such materials are well known. When the total stresses σtotal occurring in each one of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 equals the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which the 2152, 2154 is formed, eachcoupling bar 2152, 2154 will fail or yield, i.e., permanently deform or bend. The yield strength σyield strength of the material from which eachcoupling bar 2152, 2154 is formed is equal to a yield stress threshold for eachcoupling bar 2152, 2154, which also equals a yield stress threshold for thecoupling bar adapter 2150. Setting total stresses σtotal equal to the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which each 2152, 2154 is formed may be expressed by the following Equation (8):coupling bar - where σtotal = σyield strength = a yield strength of the material(s) comprising each of the first and
2152, 2154, such as steel; andsecond coupling bars - ZBar = section modulus of the
2170, 2172 of each of the first andmiddle section 2152, 2154.second coupling bars -
- When the first and
2152, 2154 have the same geometry and are made from the same material, they will each have the same section modulus ZBar. The width W for thesecond coupling bars middle section 2170 for thefirst coupling bar 2152 equals width W2170 and the width W for themiddle section 2172 for thesecond coupling bar 2154 equals width W2172. The cross-sectional area Abar for themiddle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152 may be determined by multiplying the width W2170 of themiddle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152 by the depth D2170 of themiddle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152. The cross-sectional area Abar of themiddle section 2172 for thesecond coupling bar 2154 may be determined by multiplying the width W2172 of themiddle section 2172 of thesecond coupling bar 2152 by the depth D2172 of themiddle section 2172 of thesecond coupling bar 2154. - Hence, various combinations of the width W and the cross sectional area Aplate for each
2152, 2154 may be substituted into Equations (8) and (9) and appropriate values for the width W and the cross sectional area Abar are selected. Preferably, the cross sectional area Abar is selected to be sufficiently large to minimize deflection of the upper portion and maximize resiliency to prevent fatigue of the first andcoupling bar 2152, 2154. Using Equations (8) and (9), eachsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 is designed so that thecoupling bar 2152, 2154 fails when the modified force FM1 is applied to thecoupling bar upper boom portion 1104/theconnector 1164 at the location illustrated inFIGS. 41 and46 , or a moment is generated by a force F applied anywhere along theupper boom portion 1104 and having a moment arm extending to any location on thebackrest 34, in which the moment generated by that force F is equal to or greater than the moment MFM1. Hence, both 2152, 2154 will fail or yield prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator'scoupling bars backrest 34. - Determining the modified force FM1 and the corresponding moment MFM1 may be found using finite element analysis methods so as to allow the width W and the cross sectional area Aplate for each
2152, 2154 to be calculated from Equations (8) and (9).coupling bar - It is further contemplated that the shear force threshold for each of the
180, 182 and the yield stress threshold for each of thepins 1152, 1154 or thecoupling plates 2152, 2154 may be designed via experimentation using actual boom assemblies (e.g., by applying one or more external forces to actual boom assemblies to allow each of thebars 180, 182, thepins 1152, 1154, and thecoupling plates 2152, 2154 to be designed so that eachbars 180, 182,pin 1152, 1154, andcoupling plate 2152, 2154 yields or fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest 34). Hence, thebar 180, 182, thepins 1152, 1154, and thecoupling plates 2152, 2154 are designed so that when one or more external forces are applied to a boom assembly sufficient to cause internal stresses in each of thebars 180, 182, thepins 1152, 1154, and thecoupling plates 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of eachbars 180, 182,pin 1152, 1154, andcoupling plate 2152, 2154,bar 180, 182,pin 1152, 1154, andcoupling plate 2152, 2154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator's backrest. Thebar 180, 182, thepins 1152, 1154, and thecoupling plates 2152, 2154 may also be designed via one or more suitable computer modelling techniques such that each of thebars 180, 182, thepins 1152, 1154, and thecoupling plates 2152, 2154 fails prior to structural integrity damage occurring at the operator'sbars backrest 34. - As shown in
FIG. 40 , theupper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F1, at an angle to thefirst wall 1104A-1 of theupper boom portion 1104 and generally extending toward theforks 16. When a horizontal component of the external force F1 (indicated by line h) acting on thefirst wall 1104A-1 of theupper boom portion 1104 creates internal stresses in the first and 2152, 2154, equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of each of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154, i.e., equal to or in excess of the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which eachsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 is formed, thecoupling bar adapter 2150 yields or fails and enters the first failed state, and theconnector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward theforks 16, as shown inFIGS. 35 and36 . In other words, application of the external force F1 to theupper boom portion 1104 may cause displacement of theconnector 1164 in thefirst bending direction 250, and when the magnitude of the external force F1 is sufficient to cause one or more internal stresses in each of the first and 2152, 2154 to equal or exceed the yield stress threshold of each of the first andsecond coupling bars second coupling bars 2152, 2154 (i.e., the external force F1 on theupper boom portion 1104 causes theconnector 1164 to create stresses in the first and 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of each of the first andsecond coupling bars second coupling bars 2152, 2154), the first and 2152, 2154 fail and begin to plastically deform, i.e., bend, in thesecond coupling bars first bending direction 250, as indicated by bent first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' inFIG. 36 . A yield stress threshold of theadapter 2150 may equal the yield stress threshold for each of the first and 2152, 2154. Failure and deformation of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 allows thesecond coupling bars connector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, to rotate or be displaced in thefirst bending direction 250, i.e., toward theforks 16. - The first and
2152, 2154 may be formed from the same material, e.g., a metal such as steel, and may have the same structure/geometry, such that the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 each have the same yield stress threshold. The respective width W2170, W2172 and depth D2170, D2172 of thesecond coupling bars 2170, 2172 of each of themiddle section first coupling bar 2152 and thesecond coupling bar 2154, the cross sectional area Abar of the 2170, 2172 of eachmiddle section 2152, 2154, and the material from which each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 is formed, which material has a given yield strength σyield strength defining the yield stress threshold of the first andcoupling bar 2152, 2154 may be selected, such that the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 fail or yield before the one or more external forces applied to thesecond coupling bars upper boom portion 104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34. In the example shown, the first and 2152, 2154 may bend at a location adjacent to the respective center C2152, C2154.second coupling bars - The first and
2152, 2154 plastically deform to allow controlled movement of thesecond coupling bars upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to thebase mount 1102, as shown inFIGS. 35 and36 . A first portion of an upper end surface of thebase mount 1102, i.e., a first portion 2169-1 of anupper end surface 2169 of thebase mount 1102, and a first portion of a lower end surface of theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., a first portion 2167-1 of a lower end surface 2167 of thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164, provide a first stop that limits rotation of theconnector 1164, and theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in thefirst bending direction 250. Theconnector 1164 is depicted inFIGS. 35 and36 as having rotated by about 45 degrees from a normal operating position with respect to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. The first portion 2167-1 of the lower end surface 2167 of thelower element 1166 may comprise a sloped edge, and the first portion 2169-1 of theupper end surface 2169 of thebase mount 1102 may comprise a corresponding sloped edge. If theconnector 1164 continues rotating in thefirst bending direction 250 beyond about 45 degrees, the sloped edge of the first portion 2167-1 of the lower end surface 2167 engages the sloped edge of the first portion 2169-1 of theupper end surface 2169, with engagement between the sloped edges acting as the first stop to halt rotation of theconnector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees. - The first and
2152, 2154 may resist rotation of thesecond coupling bars connector 1164 in thefirst bending direction 250 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of theupper boom portion 1104. The amount of resistance provided by the first and 2152, 2154 may be selected based on the material and/or geometry. Thesecond coupling bars adapter 2150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F1, causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and 2152, 2154 to equal or exceed the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154, the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 may hold thesecond coupling bars upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. As shown inFIG. 36 , the first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' plastically deform/bend upon failure and are designed not to break or fracture when typical or expected one or more external forces, i.e., force F1 strike theupper boom portion 1104 such that the first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' remain connected/attached toconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to thetruck 10, thebase mount 1102 and theupper boom portion 1104, theaccessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects. Even at very high magnitudes of the impact force F1 occurring at theupper boom portion 1104, bothcoupling bars 2152', 2154' will remain coupled to theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F1 moves over or past theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., theadapter 2150 is fixedly coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 via theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 and thebase mount 1102, as thecoupling bars 2152', 2154' will yield or deflect before thecoupling bars 2152', 2154' separate from theupper boom portion 1104 and/or thebase mount 1102. Further, the angle of deflection of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' will stabilize at the final angular position once the object imparting the impact force F1 is no longer in contact with theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., the first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' have sufficient rigidity that the weight of theupper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' after the impact force has been removed. Hence, the plastically deformed first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' hold theupper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which thecoupling bars 2152', 2154' are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., theupper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' do not further deform or move angularly relative to thebase mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. - As shown in
FIG. 40 , theupper boom portion 1104 may be subjected to an external impact force, i.e., exemplary force F2, in a direction generally toward thepower unit 14. When the force F2 acting on thesecond wall 1104A-2 of theupper boom portion 1104 creates one or more internal stresses in the first and 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154, thesecond coupling bars adapter 2150 yields or fails and enters the second failed state, and theconnector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, are displaced toward thepower unit 14, as shown inFIGS. 37 and38 . In other words, application of the external force F2 to theupper boom portion 1104 causes displacement of theconnector 1164 in thesecond bending direction 252, and when the magnitude of the external force F2 is sufficient to cause one or more internal stresses in the first and 2152, 2154 to equal or exceed the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling bars second coupling bars 2152, 2154 (i.e., the external force F2 on theupper boom portion 1104 causes theconnector 1164 to create stresses in the first and 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the respective yield stress threshold of each of the first andsecond coupling bars second coupling bars 2152, 2154), the first and 2152, 2154 fail and begin to plastically deform, i.e., bend, in thesecond coupling bars second bending direction 252, as indicated by bent first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" inFIG. 38 . Failure and deformation of the first and 2152, 2154 allows thesecond coupling bars connector 1164, along with theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, to rotate or be displaced in thesecond bending direction 252, i.e., toward thepower unit 14. - As described herein, the material(s) and/or structure/geometry of the first and
2152, 2154 may be selected so that the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 have a yield stress threshold that allows the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 to begin failing before the one or more external forces applied to thesecond coupling bars upper boom portion 1104 cause damage to, or failure of, the structural integrity of the operator'sbackrest 34. In the example shown, the first and 2152, 2154 may bend at a location adjacent to the respective center C2152, C2154. Hence, the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 may be designed so that thesecond coupling bars adapter 2150 yields or fails before one or more external forces applied to theupper boom portion 1104 cause an element or component of thetruck 10, i.e., the operator'sbackrest 34, to which theboom assembly 1100 is coupled to fail. Theboom assembly 1100 is considered to comprise the structure, i.e., the first and 116A, 116B and the first andsecond brackets 108A, 108B, for coupling thesecond flanges base mount 1102 to thetruck 10. - The first and
2152, 2154 plastically deform to allow controlled movement of thesecond coupling bars upper boom portion 1104 to a final deformed angular position relative to thebase mount 1102, as shown inFIGS. 37 and38 . A second portion of the upper end surface of thebase mount 1102, i.e., a second portion 2169-2 of theupper end surface 2169 of thebase mount 1102, and a second portion of the lower end surface of theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., a second portion 2167-2 of the lower end surface 2167 of thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164, provide a second stop that limits rotation of theconnector 1164, and theupper boom portion 1104 coupled thereto, in thesecond bending direction 252. Theconnector 1164 is depicted inFIGS. 23 and24 as having rotated by about 45 degrees from a normal operating position with respect to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. The second portion 2167-2 of the lower surface 2167 of thelower element 1166 may comprise a sloped edge, and the second portion 2169-2 of theupper end surface 2169 of thebase mount 1102 may comprise a corresponding sloped edge. If theconnector 1164 continues rotating in thesecond bending direction 252 beyond about 45 degrees, the sloped edge of the second portion 2167-2 of the lower surface 2167 engages the sloped edge of the second portion 2169-2 of theupper end surface 2169, with engagement between the sloped edges acting as the second stop to halt rotation of theconnector 1164 beyond about 90 degrees. - The first and
2152, 2154 may resist rotation of thesecond coupling bars connector 1164 in thesecond bending direction 252 and may absorb at least a portion of the energy resulting from the impact to slow and eventually stop the displacement of theupper boom portion 1104. The amount of resistance provided by the first and 2152, 2154 may be selected based on the material and/or geometry. Thesecond coupling bars adapter 2150 is configured such that upon removal of the one or more external forces, i.e., force F2, causing the one or more internal stresses in the first and 2152, 2154 equal to or in excess of the yield stress threshold of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154, the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 hold thesecond coupling bars upper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position to prevent free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. As shown inFIG. 38 , the first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" plastically deform/bend upon failure but do not break or fracture, such that the first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" remain connected/attached toconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102, thereby preventing or minimizing damage to thetruck 10, thebase mount 1102 and theupper boom portion 1104, theaccessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects. Even at very high magnitudes of the impact force F2 occurring at theupper boom portion 1104, bothcoupling bars 2152", 2154" will remain coupled to theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 as the object imparting the impact force F2 moves over or past theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., theadapter 2150 is fixedly coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 via theconnector 1164 and thebase mount 1102 and has sufficient strength to remain coupled to theupper boom portion 1104 and thebase mount 1102, as thecoupling bars 2152", 2154" will yield or deflect before thecoupling bars 2152", 2154" separate from theupper boom portion 1104 and/or thebase mount 1102. Further, the angle of deflection of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" will stabilize at the final deformed angular position once the object imparting the impact force F2 is no longer in contact with theupper boom portion 1104, i.e., the first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" have sufficient rigidity that the weight of theupper boom portion 1104 will have little or no impact on the amount of deformation occurring at the first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" after the impact force has been removed. Hence, the plastically deformed first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" hold theupper boom portion 1104 at the final deformed angular position in which thecoupling bars 2152", 2154" are located when the impact force is removed, i.e., theupper boom portion 1104 is held in a fixed position and the first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" do not further deform or move angularly relative to thebase mount 1102 after the impact force has been removed and the first andsecond coupling bars 2152", 2154" have stabilized, thereby preventing free-falling over of theupper boom portion 1104. - With reference to
FIG. 39 , the length L3 of the 106, 1106 of themain body 102, 1102 may be adjusted or configured to place or locate thebase mount 150, 1150, 2150 at a desired height H1 above theadapter forks 16 and the operator'splatform 32. The height H1 may be based in part on the operator height H2 for a 95th percentile adult male. In particular, the height H1 may be greater than the operator height H2 to ensure that the 150, 1150, 2150 is located high enough above the operator that theadapter 104, 1104 does not contact the operator upon failure of theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150. For example, the operator height H2 may be 75 inches, and the height H1 may be 84 inches.adapter - Positioning the
150, 1150, 2150 at the height H1 may also help to prevent damage to theadapter truck 10, the 100, 1100, theboom assembly accessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel and objects by ensuring that when the 150, 1150, 2150 enters the first or second failed state, theadapter 104, 1104 remains clear of the rest of theupper boom portion truck 10, including, for example, theantenna 66, theforks 16, and/or a load positioned on theforks 16, and remains clear of adjacent objects and personnel. The 104, 1104 may deflect relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102, i.e., relative to the vertical axis v, in thebase mount first bending direction 250 toward theforks 16 by an angle α1, in which the angle α1 is greater than 0 degrees and up to about 90 degrees. The 104, 1104 may deflect relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102, i.e., relative to the vertical axis v, in thebase mount second bending direction 252 toward thepower unit 14 by an angle α2, in which the angle α2 is greater than 0 degree and up to about 90 degrees. In the examples shown inFIGS. 7 and9 where the 100, 1100 is depicted in the first and second failed states, respectively, theboom assembly 104, 1104 is illustrated as being deflected at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to theupper boom portion 102, 1102.base mount - The
150, 1150, 2150 and the components thereof may be modular or interchangeable, such that upon failure, theadapter 150, 1150, 2150 may be removed and replaced and theadapter 100, 1100 may be reassembled. For example, with reference to the example shown inboom assembly FIG. 8 , the broken pin 180' may be removed from theadapter 150 and replaced with a new pin. With reference to the examples shown inFIGS. 10 and11 , the upper and lower plate mounts 1156, 1160 and 1158, 1162 and the bent first and second coupling plates 1152', 1154' of theadapter 1150 or the bent first andsecond coupling bars 2152', 2154' of theadapter 2150 may be removed and replaced. Because the 150, 1150, 2150 yields to impact forces applied to theadapter 100, 1100, theboom assembly 150, 1150, 2150 as described herein may help to prevent damage to theadapter 102, 1102, thebase mount 104, 1104, and/or theupper boom portion accessory 300, thereby reducing the cost of replacement, preventing or minimizing the need to repair thetruck 10, and reducing the amount of down time before thetruck 10 can resume normal operations. - Referring to
FIG. 47A , the truck 10 (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ) may include aprocessing device 400 that is implemented as a special purpose, particular computer that mounts to or is otherwise integrated with thetruck 10. Theprocessing device 400 comprises the necessary circuitry to implement wireless communication, data and information processing, and wired (and optionally wireless) communication to components of thetruck 10. As a few illustrative examples, theprocessing device 400 includes atransceiver 402 for wireless communication. Although asingle transceiver 402 is illustrated for convenience, in practice, one or more wireless communication technologies may be provided. Thetransceiver 402 may communicate with a remote server (not shown) and may also optionally support other wireless communication, such as cellular, Bluetooth, infrared (IR) or any other technology or combination of technologies. For instance, using a cellular to IP bridge thetransceiver 402 can use a cellular signal to communicate directly with the remote server. - The
processing device 400 also comprises acontrol module 404 having a processor coupled to memory for implementing computer instructions, including computer-implemented processes, or aspects thereof, as set out and described more fully herein. Thecontrol module 404 communicates with the components set forth inFIG. 47A , making the processing device 400 a particular machine different from a general-purpose computer. For instance, thecontrol module 404 may utilize thetransceiver 402 to exchange information with the remote server for controlling operation of thetruck 10, for remotely storing information extracted from thetruck 10, etc. - The
processing device 400 further includespower enabling circuitry 406 controlled by thecontrol module 404 to selectively enable or disable the truck 10 (or alternatively, to selectively enable or disable specific control modules or vehicle functions such as hydraulic, traction, etc.). For instance, thecontrol module 404 can control the vehiclepower enabling circuitry 406 to provide power to thetruck 10, select components of thetruck 10, select vehicle functions, etc. viapower line 408, e.g., based upon operator login, detected geo-features, etc. - Still further, the
processing device 400 includes a monitoring input output (I/O)module 410 to communicate via wired or wireless connection to peripheral devices attached to or otherwise mounted on thetruck 10, such as sensors, meters, encoders, switches, etc. (collectively represented by reference numeral 412). Themodule 410 may also be connected to other devices, e.g.,third party devices 414 such as RFID scanners, displays, meters or other devices. This allows thecontrol module 404 to obtain and process information monitored on thetruck 10. - The
processing device 400 is coupled to and/or communicates with other vehicle system components via a suitablevehicle network bus 416. Thevehicle network bus 416 is any wired or wireless network, bus or other communications capability that allows electronic components of thetruck 10 to communicate with each other. As an example, thevehicle network bus 416 may comprise a controller area network (CAN) bus, Local Interconnect Network (LIN), time-triggered data-bus protocol (TTP) or other suitable communication technology. - Utilization of the
vehicle network bus 416 enables seamless integration of thecontrol module 404 and other components of theprocessing device 400 into native electronics of thetruck 10. In the example configuration, thecontrol module 404 of theprocessing device 400 connects with, understands and is capable of communication with native vehicle electronic components, such as traction controllers, hydraulic controllers, modules, devices, bus enabled sensors, displays, lights, light bars, sound generating devices, headsets, microphones, haptic devices, etc. (collectively referred to by reference 418). -
FIG. 47B illustrates various operational modules of the truck 10 (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ). The modules illustrated inFIG. 47B may comprise software code stored in memory that may be controlled, read and manipulated by, for example, thecontrol module 404 ofFIG. 47A . Thetruck 10 may comprise an integrity monitoring system (IMS) 420 that monitors a state of theboom assembly 100, 1100 (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ) to determine when the 104, 1104 has deflected and is no longer aligned with theupper boom portion 102, 1102. Thebase mount IMS 420 may include amain module 422 with asteer control module 424, adisplay module 426, atraction control module 428, and alift control module 430 that are coupled to and communicate via anetwork bus 432. Although theIMS 420 is depicted as including 424, 426, 428, 430, it may be understood that themodules IMS 420 may include fewer modules or additional modules (not shown). Alternatively, theIMS 420 may be implemented as a separate module (not shown). - The
steer control module 424 is coupled to and communicates with asteer motor 434 that controls a position of the steerable drive wheel 22 (seeFIG. 39 ). Thetraction control module 428 is coupled to and communicates with abrake 436, amain contactor 438, and atraction motor 440 to control speed and directions of movement of thetruck 10. Thedisplay module 426 is coupled to and communicates with auser interface 442 to display information to an operator of thetruck 10. Thelift control module 430 is coupled to and communicates with alift motor 444 to control lifting and lowering of the load handling assembly 12 (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ). Akey switch 446 is coupled to themain module 422 and allows thetruck 10 to be turned off and on. TheIMS 420 comprises one ormore sensors 420A-420E. - Referring to
FIG. 48 , a schematic block diagram illustrates anexemplary computer system 500 for implementing the various processes described herein, e.g., implementing any of the 424, 426, 428, 430 ofmodules FIG. 47B . Theexemplary computer system 500 comprises one or more (hardware)electronic microprocessors 510 and corresponding (hardware) memory 520 (e.g., random access memory and/or read only memory) that are connected to asystem bus 530. The one ormore microprocessors 510 may include a single processor, a symmetric multiprocessor system, or other configuration including a plurality of processors connected to thesystem bus 530. Information may be passed between thesystem bus 530 and alocal bus 550 by asuitable bridge 540 to communicate with various input/output devices. For instance, thelocal bus 550 may be used to interface peripherals with the one ormore microprocessors 510, such as storage 560 (e.g., hard disk drives)); removable media storage device(s) 570 (e.g., flash drives, DVD-ROM drives, CD-ROM drives, floppy drives, etc.); I/O devices 580 (e.g., theuser interface 442 ofFIG. 47B , etc.); and one ormore network adapters 590. Thenetwork adapters 590, where provided, allow themicroprocessor 510 to communicate across one or more of the vehicle network systems (e.g.,bus 432 ofFIG. 47B ). In this regard,example adapters 590 may comprise Bluetooth®, Ethernet, CAN bus, RS422, LIN Bus, WiFi, cellular, etc. This list of peripherals is presented by way of illustration, and is not intended to be limiting. Other peripheral devices may be suitably integrated into thecomputer system 500. Thememory 520,storage 560, removable media insertable into theremovable media storage 570, or combinations thereof may be used to implement the methods, configurations, interfaces and other aspects set out and described herein. - The microprocessor(s) 510 control operation of the
exemplary computer system 500. Moreover, one or more of the microprocessor(s) 510 execute computer readable code (e.g., stored in thememory 520,storage 560, removable media insertable into theremovable media storage 570, or combinations thereof - collectively or individually, computer-program products) that instructs the microprocessor(s) 510 to implement the methods and processes herein. The computer readable code may be stored for instance, in thememory 520,storage 560, removable media storage device(s) 570, or other suitable tangible storage medium accessible by the microprocessor(s) 510. Thememory 520 may also function as a working memory, e.g., to store data, an operating system, etc. A "controller," as used in the claims may include the microprocessor(s) 510 or thesystem 500. - The methods and processes herein may be implemented as a machine-executable method executed on a computer system, e.g., one or more general computing devices, a particular computing device such as the
processing device 400 ofFIG. 47A , or combinations thereof. Thus, the exemplary computer system or components thereof can implement processes and/or computer-implemented processes stored on one or more computer-readable storage devices as set out in greater detail herein. Other computer configurations may also implement the processes and/or computer-implemented processes stored on one or more computer-readable storage devices as set out in greater detail herein. Computer-program code for carrying out operations for aspects of the present disclosure may be written in any combination of one or more programming languages. The program code may execute entirely on thecomputer system 500 or partly on thecomputer system 500. In the latter scenario, a remote computer may be connected to thecomputer system 500 through any type of network connection, e.g., using thenetwork adapter 590 of thecomputer system 500. - In implementing computer aspects of the present disclosure, any combination of computer-readable medium may be utilized. The computer-readable medium may be a computer readable signal medium, a computer-readable storage medium, or a combination thereof. Moreover, a computer-readable storage medium may be implemented in practice as one or more distinct mediums. A computer-readable signal medium is a transitory propagating signal per se. A computer-readable signal medium may include computer readable program code embodied therein, for example, as a propagated data signal in baseband or as part of a carrier wave. More specifically, a computer-readable signal medium does not encompass a computer-readable storage medium. A computer-readable storage medium is a tangible device/hardware that can retain and store a program (instructions) for use by or in connection with an instruction execution system, apparatus, or device, e.g., a computer or other processing device set out more fully herein. Notably, a computer-readable storage medium does not encompass a computer-readable signal medium. Thus, a computer readable storage medium, as used herein, is not to be construed as being transitory signals per se, such as radio waves or other freely propagating electromagnetic waves through a transmission media.
- Specific examples (a non-exhaustive list) of the computer-readable storage medium include the following: a hard disk, a random-access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), Flash memory, a portable computer storage device, an optical storage device such as a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or digital video disk (DVD), or any suitable combination of the foregoing. In particular, a computer-readable storage medium includes computer-readable hardware such as a computer-readable storage device, e.g., memory. Here, a computer-readable storage device and computer-readable hardware are physical, tangible implementations that are non-transitory. By non-transitory, it is meant that, unlike a transitory propagating signal per se, which will naturally cease to exist, the contents of the computer-readable storage device or computer-readable hardware that define the claimed subject matter persists until acted upon by an external action. For instance, program code loaded into random access memory (RAM) is deemed non-transitory in that the content will persist until acted upon, e.g., by removing power, by overwriting, deleting, modifying, etc. Moreover, since hardware comprises physical element(s) or component(s) of a corresponding computer system, hardware does not encompass software, per se.
- As shown in
FIGS. 1A and1B , thesensors 420A-420E of theIMS 420 may be associated with the 100, 1100 and/or theboom assembly truck 10 and may be placed at one or more locations. The illustrated locations of thesensors 420A-420E are by way of example only, and it may be understood that thesensors 420A-420E may be placed at different locations. For example, thetruck 10 may comprise one or more sensors (not shown) that are located within thecompartment 44. In addition, one or more of thesensors 420A-420E may be co-located at a single location, e.g., within a single sensor device. TheIMS 420 may also comprise a greater or smaller number ofsensors 420A-420E than is depicted inFIGS. 1A and1B . - The
sensors 420A-420E are each configured to sense one or more parameters, e.g., velocity, acceleration, position, strain, and orientation related to theupper boom portion 104 to detect or indicate when or that the 104, 1104 has deflected and is no longer aligned with theupper boom portion 102, 1102. As described herein, each of thebase mount sensors 420A-420E are further configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing a corresponding parameter, which signals are transmitted to theIMS 420 for processing. - One or more of the
sensors 420A-420E may detect an angular velocity of the 104, 1104, in which the angular velocity exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that theadapter 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with thebase mount 102, 1102. During normal operation of thebase mount truck 10, the 104, 1104 experiences vibration and other minor movements that may affect the angular velocity measurement. In some examples, these angular velocity values may be filtered out, e.g., via a low pass filter, so that only values exceeding the predetermined threshold cause theupper boom portion IMS 420 to take action. That is, when the sensed angular velocity exceeds the predetermined threshold, the processor determines that the 104, 1104 has deflected or yielded relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102. With reference tobase mount FIG. 49 , the one ormore sensors 420A-420E may comprise a gyroscope 405 that is associated with theupper boom portion 1104, e.g., attached to thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 or attached to any other location along the length of theupper boom portion 1104, and may measure the angular motion, i.e., angular velocity, of the 104, 1104. In some examples, the gyroscope 405 may be a separate sensor device, and in other examples, the gyroscope 405 may be part of a single sensor device that comprises anotherupper boom portion sensor 420A-420E, e.g., an accelerometer 403 as described herein. While the example shown inFIG. 49 includes theadapter 2150 comprising 2152, 2154, the gyroscope 405 may also be used with thecoupling bars boom assembly 100 and the 150, 1150 as described herein.adapters - One or more of the
sensors 420A-420E may comprise one or more strain gauges (not shown) that senses a strain level in the 1150, 2150. For example, in an illustrated embodiment, the strain gauge may sense a strain level in one or more coupling members, in which the strain level exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of theadapter upper boom portion 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the 1150, 2150 to yield, such that theadapter upper boom portion 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to thebase mount 1102 and is no longer aligned with thebase mount 1102. For example, with reference to the 1150, 2150 shown inadapters FIGS. 4-6 ,10 , and11 , the strain gauge may likewise be positioned directly on one or both of the first and 1152, 1154 or one or both of the first andsecond coupling plates 2152, 2154 so as to sense the strain level in one or both of the first andsecond coupling bars 1152, 1154 or one or both of the first andsecond coupling plates 2152, 2154. During normal operation of thesecond coupling bars truck 10, the 104, 1104 experiences vibration and other minor movements that may cause theupper boom portion 1152, 1154, or the coupling bars 2152, 2154 to experience strain. These strain levels are relatively low and may be filtered out, e.g., via a low pass filter, so that only values exceeding the predetermined threshold cause thecoupling plates IMS 420 to take action. - One or more of the
sensors 420A-420E may detect a change in a position of the 104, 1104 relative to a predetermined reference, in which the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 no longer being aligned with theupper boom portion 102, 1102. For example, one or more of thebase mount sensors 420A-420E may comprise an imaging device, such as a camera. The imaging device may be theaccessory 300 and/or may include one or more separate imaging devices associated with the 104, 1104, e.g., at the location indicated byupper boom portion sensor 420A inFIGS. 1A and1B , such that the imaging device is positioned at a predetermined height above theforks 16. A field of view of the imaging device or a portion thereof may define a bounding box extending in a direction parallel to the c and h axes that includes at least a portion of the forks 16 (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ). The bounding box includes one or more targets, e.g., one or more landmarks, flags, or markers, associated with theforks 16 or another component of thetruck 10, e.g., theload backrest 20 and/or the operator'sbackrest 34. The one or more targets each have a predefined location in the bounding box. During normal operation of thetruck 10, the 104, 1104 experiences vibration and other minor movements that may affect the location of the one or more targets in the bounding box. A reference image may be generated that includes an average of the location(s) of the one or more targets across several images obtained over a time period, which serves as the predetermined reference and establishes a baseline to account for noise and jitter that occur during normal operation of theupper boom portion truck 10. A location of the one or more targets in a current image may be compared to the location of the one or more targets in the reference image, and when a change between the two locations exceeds a predetermined threshold, this change is indicative of the 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that theadapter 104, 1104 moves to a deformed or deflected position relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with thebase mount 102, 1102. In some examples with multiple targets, each target may be assigned a weight that is used in determining whether the change exceeds the predetermined threshold, e.g., to account for the presence of a load on thebase mount forks 16 that may obstruct one or more of the targets. - With reference to
FIGS. 50 and 51 , the one ormore sensors 420A-420E (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ) that detect a change in a position of theupper boom portion 1104 relative to a predetermined reference may include one or more limit switches 407. In the example shown, thelimit switch 407 comprises a main switch body 407-1 and a lever 407-2. The main switch body 407-1 is coupled to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102 via a bracket (not labeled) or other suitable attachment means, and the lever 407-2 is positioned adjacent to thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164. During normal operation of thetruck 10, the lever 407-2 is in an upright position as shown inFIG. 50 , which upright position may be used as the predetermined reference. As shown inFIG. 51 , when theupper boom portion 1104 deflects relative to thebase mount 1102, thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164 contacts, and causes movement of, the lever 407-2 toward a deflected position. The current position of the lever 407-2 is compared to the position of the lever 407-2 during normal operation of thetruck 10, and when a difference between the positions exceeds a predetermined threshold, this difference is indicative of theupper boom portion 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theadapter 2150 to yield and thecoupling bars 2152', 2154' to plastically deform, such that theupper boom portion 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to thebase mount 1102 and is no longer aligned with thebase mount 1102. For example, the predetermined threshold may be set to a distance corresponding to a deflection of theupper boom portion 1104 relative to thebase mount 1102 of 45 degrees, such that detection of a distance exceeding this value is indicative of theupper boom portion 1104 having deflected such that theupper boom portion 1104 is no longer aligned with thebase mount 1102. Thelimit switch 407 may be configured such that movement of the lever 407-2 from the upright position shown inFIG. 50 to the deflected position shown inFIG. 51 causes thelimit switch 407 to move from a closed position generating, for example, a high signal, to an open position generating, for example, a low signal. It is also contemplated that a second limit switch (not shown) may be positioned on an opposing side of themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102 to sense deflection of theupper boom portion 1104 in a direction opposite to the direction illustrated inFIG. 51 . While the example shown inFIG. 51 includes theadapter 2150 withcoupling bars 2152', 2154', thelimit switch 407 may also be used with theboom assembly 100 and the 150, 1150 as described herein.adapters - With reference to
FIGS. 52 and 53 , the one ormore sensors 420A-420E (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ) that detect a change in a position of theupper boom portion 1104 relative to a predetermined reference may include a proximity sensor. In the example shown, the proximity sensor comprises anoptical sensor 409 that is positioned adjacent to thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164. Theoptical sensor 409 may be coupled to themain body 1106 of thebase mount 1102. Theoptical sensor 409 may comprise an emitter 409-1 that transmits a beam of light (visible or invisible) toward thelower element 1166. During normal operation of thetruck 10, thelower element 1166 is located within a path of the light emitted by the emitter 409-1, such that light is reflected back toward theoptical sensor 409. In some examples, theoptical sensor 409 may also include an internal receiver (not labeled) that receives the reflected light to indicate a presence of thelower element 1166. In other examples, a separate receiver (not shown) may be positioned opposite the emitter 409-1 such as on thelower element 1166, and when thelower element 1166 is in the normal operating position, the beam of light from the emitter 409-1 is sensed by the receiver, such that the separate receiver receives the output from the emitter 409-1 and the presence of thelower element 1166 is indicated. In both examples, the amount of light received may be used as the predetermined reference. When theupper boom portion 1104 deflects relative to thebase mount 1102 as shown inFIG. 53 , thelower element 1166 is no longer located in the path of the light, such that light is no longer reflected back to the internal receiver in theoptical sensor 409 and/or light is no longer received by the separate receiver. When a change in the amount of reflected light and/or received light exceeds a predetermined threshold, this change is indicative of theupper boom portion 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theadapter 2150 to yield and thecoupling bars 2152', 2154' to plastically deform, such that theupper boom portion 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to thebase mount 1102 and is no longer aligned with thebase mount 1102. While the example shown inFIG. 51 includes theadapter 2150 withcoupling bars 2152', 2154', thelimit switch 407 may also be used with the 150, 1150 as described herein. In addition, it may be understood that the proximity sensor may include any type of suitable sensor, including an inductive proximity sensor, a capacitive proximity sensor, a magnetic proximity sensor (e.g., a Hall effect sensor), etc.adapter - The one or
more sensors 420A-420E that detect a change in a position of the 104, 1104 relative to a predetermined reference may include an inclination sensor (not shown) that measures an amount of tilt or inclination of theupper boom portion 104, 1104. With reference toupper boom portion FIGS. 1A and1B , in some examples, the inclination sensor may include at least one first inclination sensor located on theupper boom portion 104, 1104 (e.g., one or more ofsensors 420A-420C), in which case the inclination of the 104, 1104 may be measured with respect to gravity. In other examples, the inclination sensor may further include at least one second inclination sensor located on theupper boom portion 102, 1102 or the truck 10 (e.g.,base mount sensors 420D and/or 420E), in which case the inclination of the 104, 1104 may be determined based on the position of the first inclination sensor relative to the second inclination sensor. During normal operation of theupper boom portion truck 10, the 104, 1104 has a first angle with respect to gravity or with respect to the second inclination sensor. For example, prior to failure, theupper boom portion 104, 1104 is upright, such that the first angle between theupper boom portion sensor 420C and (i) gravity; or (ii) with respect tosensor 420D should be approximately zero or another initial value. For example, when only a single inclination sensor is provided, the first angle may be calibrated when thetruck 10 is not moving and the 104, 1104 is aligned with theupper boom portion 102, 1102. The current angle of thebase mount 104, 1104 is compared to the first angle of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 during normal operation of theupper boom portion truck 10, and when a difference between the angles meets or exceeds a predetermined threshold, this difference is indicative of the 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that theadapter 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with thebase mount 102, 1102. The signal for the sensed current angle may be filtered to remove noise/jitter. For example, the predetermined threshold may be set to any angle, e.g., an angle of 45 degrees, such that when the difference between the first angle and the current angle meets or exceeds this threshold value, this is indicative of thebase mount 104, 1104 having deflected and no longer being aligned with theupper boom portion 102, 1102. If only the first inclination sensor associated with thebase mount 104, 1104 is used, the first inclination sensor may incorrectly detect a failure if theupper boom portion truck 10 is traveling along an incline. To prevent the sensor from incorrectly detecting a failure, the predetermined threshold may be set to a greater angle to include a grade limit, e.g., 10 degrees, of thetruck 10. - The one or
more sensors 420A-420C may detect an acceleration of the 104, 1104, in which the acceleration exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 being subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, such that theadapter 104, 1104 moves to a deformed position relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102 and is no longer aligned with thebase mount 102, 1102. For example, with reference tobase mount FIG. 49 , one or more of thesensors 420A-420C may comprise an accelerometer 403 that is associated with theupper boom portion 1104, e.g., attached to thelower element 1166 of theconnector 1164, and may measure the acceleration of the 104, 1104 in one or more axes. In an example, the accelerometer 403 may generate acceleration signals used by a processor on the truck 10 (e.g.,upper boom portion microprocessor 510 shown inFIG. 48 ) to generate acceleration values, from which the processor can determine if the 150, 1150, 2150 has yielded or failed. Because theadapter 104, 1104 is very rigid, the accelerometer 403 may be mounted anywhere along the length of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 and generate signals sufficient to detect adapter failure. The accelerometer 403 on theupper boom portion 104, 1104 senses the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 relative to ground.upper boom portion - With reference to the example shown in
FIGS. 54 and56 , acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 may occur when thetruck 10 accelerates in either a power unitfirst direction 290 or a forksfirst direction 292. Forces acting on theupper boom portion 1104 causing it to accelerate may include a force applied by thetruck 10 to theupper boom portion 1104 during acceleration of thetruck 10, a force applied by thetruck 10 to theupper boom portion 1104 during deceleration of thetruck 10, and an impact force striking theupper boom portion 1104. If the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is greater than a threshold total acceleration, theadapter 2150 will fail. If the magnitude of the total deceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is greater than a magnitude of a threshold total acceleration, theadapter 2150 will fail. Although the following description is provided with respect to theadapter 2150 comprising the first and 2152, 2154, it may be understood that similar calculations may be performed for thesecond coupling bars adapter 150 comprising the first and second shear pins 180, 182 (seeFIG. 8 ) and theadapter 1150 comprising the first andsecond coupling plates 1152, 1154 (seeFIG. 16 ). - With reference to
FIGS. 54 and55 , it is possible to estimate a first threshold total acceleration aTotalNeg, when the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is in the power unitfirst direction 290 or the total deceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is in the forks first direction 292 (i.e., acceleration in the power unit first direction), sufficient to cause failure of the adapter, using the following Equation (10) for moments occurring at theadapter 2150, in which theadapter 2150 comprises the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154: - With reference to
Figs. 56 and57 , it is possible to estimate a second threshold total acceleration a TotalPos, when the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is in the forksfirst direction 292 or the total deceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is in the power unit first direction 290 (i.e., acceleration in the forks first direction 292), sufficient to cause failure of theadapter 2150, using the following Equation (11) for moments occurring at theadapter 2150, in which theadapter 2150 comprises the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154: in which - zcg is a lever arm extending from a center of gravity CG of the
upper boom portion 1104 normal to a plane formed by axes c and h and containing an axis passing through the centers C2152, C2154 of the first andsecond coupling bars 2152, 2154 (seeFIG. 46 ); - ycg is a lever arm extending from the center of gravity CG of the
upper boom portion 1104 to thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 and is parallel to axis h; - Fg = Force (N) generated by the weight of the
upper boom portion 1104; - mupper = mass (kg) of the
upper boom portion 1104; - Z = section modulus of one
2152 or 2154; andbar - σ = bending stress of one
2152 or 2154.bar - In the above Equations (10) and (11), the first term ((0.5) Fgycg ) is a moment of a force Fg from half of the weight of the
upper boom portion 1104. The second term ((0.5) mupperaupper (zcg )) is a moment resulting from half of the mass of theupper boom portion 1104 accelerating due to thetruck 10 accelerating and causing theupper boom portion 1104 to accelerate and/or an impact force striking theupper boom portion 1104 causing theupper boom portion 1104 to accelerate. - The bending stress σ may be set equal to a yield strength of the material from which each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 is formed, such as a specific grade of steel from which each
2152, 2154 is formed. Yield strengths for such materials are well known. When the bending stress σ occurring in each one of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 equals the yield strength σyield strength of the material from which eachcoupling bar 2152, 2154 is formed, eachcoupling bar 2152, 2154 will fail or yield, i.e., permanently deform or bend. The section modulus Z can be calculated from the geometry of eachcoupling bar 2152, 2154 and, in the illustrated embodiment, is determined using Equation (7) above, which is set out again below:coupling bar - The width W for the
middle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152 equals width W2170 shown inFIG. 21 , and the width W for themiddle section 2172 of thesecond coupling bar 2154 equals width W2172 shown inFIG. 19 . The cross-sectional area Abar for themiddle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152 may be determined by multiplying the width W2170 of themiddle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152 by the depth D2170 (seeFIG. 19 ) of themiddle section 2170 of thefirst coupling bar 2152. The cross-sectional area Abar of themiddle section 2172 for thesecond coupling bar 2154 may be determined by multiplying the width W2172 of themiddle section 2172 of thesecond coupling bar 2152 by the depth D2172 of themiddle section 2172 of the second coupling bar 2154 (seeFIG. 19 ). - Equation (10) is solved for the first threshold total acceleration aTotalNeg causing the
adapter 2150 to fail when the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is in a direction towards thepower unit 14 and equal to the first threshold total acceleration such that theupper boom portion 1104 fails and rotates in a clockwise direction, as viewed inFIG. 54 . Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will fail when the total acceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 (seeFIG. 49 ) is in the power unitfirst direction 290 and equal to or greater than the first threshold total acceleration aTotalNeg. Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will also fail when the total deceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 is in the forks first direction 292 (i.e., acceleration in the power unit first direction 290) and the magnitude of the deceleration is equal to or greater than the magnitude of the first threshold total acceleration aTotalNeg. - Equation (11) is solved for the second threshold total acceleration aTotalPos causing the
adapter 2150 to fail when the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is in a direction towards theforks 16 and equal to the second threshold total acceleration such that theupper boom portion 1104 rotates in a counter-clockwise direction, as viewed inFIG. 56 . Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will fail when the acceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 is in the forksfirst direction 292 and equal to or greater than the second threshold total acceleration aTotalPos. Each of the coupling bars 2152, 2154 will also fail when the total deceleration measured by the accelerometer 403 is in the power unit first direction 290 (i.e., acceleration in the forks first direction 292) and the magnitude of the deceleration is equal to or greater than the magnitude of the second threshold total acceleration aTotalpos. - In an example, it is presumed that the threshold total acceleration aTotalNeg is calculated using Equation (10) to equal -1.1 g, where "g" is the acceleration due to gravity or 9.8 meter/second2. When the total acceleration of the
upper boom portion 1104 is negative and has a magnitude equal to or greater than 1.1 g, the processor determines that theadapter 2150 has failed. Acceleration in the power unitfirst direction 290 is defined as being negative. - In a further example, it is presumed that the threshold total acceleration a TotalPos is calculated using Equation (11) to equal 1.6 g. When the total acceleration of the
upper boom portion 1104 is positive and has a magnitude equal to or greater than 1.6 g, the processor determines that theadapter 2150 has failed. - Based on signals from a traction control module on the
truck 10, the processor on thetruck 10 knows if thetruck 10 is accelerating in a direction toward thepower unit 14 or theforks 16. Prior to an impact force striking theupper boom portion 1104, theupper boom portion 1104 is accelerating in the same direction as thetruck 10. When an impact force strikes theupper boom portion 1104, the impact force accelerates theupper boom portion 1104. - The accelerometer 403 is initially calibrated regarding sign. The accelerometer 403 can be calibrated to assign a positive sign to acceleration values sensed when the
upper boom portion 1104 is accelerating in the forksfirst direction 292 or decelerating in the power unitfirst direction 290. The accelerometer 403 can also be calibrated to assign a negative sign to acceleration values sensed when theupper boom portion 1104 is accelerating in the power unitfirst direction 290 or decelerating in the forksfirst direction 292. - In an example, in
FIG. 58 , thetruck 10 is accelerating in the power unitfirst direction 290. An impact force Fimpact2 strikes thesecond wall 1104A-2 of thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 and accelerates theupper boom portion 1104 in the direction toward thepower unit 14. The total acceleration on theupper boom portion 1104 is sensed by the accelerometer 403 to be - 1.1 g. Since the total acceleration sensed by the accelerometer 403 is negative, the processor compares the magnitude of the total acceleration value to the magnitude of the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg, which, in this example, is 1.1g. Since the magnitude of the sensed total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 equals 1.1g, which equals the magnitude of the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg, namely, 1.1g, the processor indicates that theadapter 2150 has yielded or failed. - In an example, in
FIG. 59 , thetruck 10 is decelerating in the forks first direction 292 (i.e., accelerating in the power unit first direction 290). An impact force Fimpact2 strikes thesecond wall 1104A-2 of thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 and accelerates theupper boom portion 1104 in the direction toward thepower unit 14. The total deceleration on theupper boom portion 1104 is sensed by the accelerometer 403 to be an acceleration in the opposite direction to vehicle velocity having a value of - 1.1 g (the acceleration is negative since acceleration in the power unitfirst direction 290 is defined as negative). Since the total acceleration sensed by the accelerometer 403 is negative, the processor compares the magnitude of the total acceleration value to the magnitude of the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg, which, in this example, is 1.1g. Since the magnitude of the sensed total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 equals 1.1g, which equals the magnitude of the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg, namely, 1.1g, the processor indicates that theadapter 2150 has yielded or failed. - In another example, in
FIG. 60 , thetruck 10 is accelerating in the power unitfirst direction 290. An impact force Fimpact1 strikes thefirst wall 1104A-1 of thefirst section 1104A of theupper boom portion 1104 and accelerates theupper boom portion 1104 in the direction toward theforks 16. The accelerometer 403 senses a total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104, which is 1.6g (in the forks first direction 292). Since the total acceleration sensed by the accelerometer 403 is positive, the processor compares the magnitude of the total acceleration value to the magnitude of the second threshold total acceleration a TotalPos, which, in this example, is 1.6g. Since the magnitude of the sensed total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 equals 1.6g, which equals the magnitude of the second threshold total acceleration aTotalpos, namely, 1.6g, the processor determines that theadapter 2150 has yielded or failed. - It is also contemplated that acceleration values along the c and v axes (see
FIGS. 1A and1B ) may be monitored and thresholds corresponding to yielding or failure of theadapter 2150 may similarly be determined. - As indicated in the flowchart illustrated in
FIG. 61 , the processor, at 600, determines if a total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 as sensed by the accelerometer 403 is negative. If yes, the processor determines at 602 if the magnitude of the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is greater than or equal to the first threshold total acceleration a Totalneg. If yes, the processor at 604 generates an alert indicating that theadapter 2150 has failed or yielded. If the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is less than the first threshold total acceleration a TotalNeg , the processor at 606 compares the velocity of theupper boom portion 1104, which can be determined by integrating the acceleration values determined from the acceleration signals generated by the accelerometer 403, with the truck velocity, which truck velocity the processor may access from a traction control module 428 (seeFIG. 47B ) on thetruck 10. If a magnitude of a difference between the velocity of theupper boom portion 1104 and the velocity of thetruck 10 is greater than a threshold amount to filter out noise or jitter, the processor generates at 608 an alert indicating that theadapter 2150 has failed or yielded. If the magnitude of the difference between the velocity of theupper boom portion 1104 and the velocity of thetruck 10 is not greater than the threshold amount, the processor returns to 600. - If the processor determines at 600 that the total acceleration of the
upper boom portion 1104 as sensed by the accelerometer 403 is not negative, then the processor at 610 determines if the magnitude of the total acceleration of the upper boom portion is greater than or equal to the second threshold total acceleration aTotalPos. If yes, the processor at 612 generates an alert indicating that theadapter 2150 has failed or yielded. If the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 is less than the second threshold total acceleration a TotalPos, the processor at 614 compares the velocity of theupper boom portion 1104 with the truck velocity. If the magnitude of the difference between the velocity of theupper boom portion 1104 and the velocity of thetruck 10 is greater than a threshold amount to filter out noise/jitter, the processor generates at 616 an alert indicating that theadapter 2150 has failed or yielded. If the magnitude of the difference between the velocity of theupper boom portion 1104 and the velocity of thetruck 10 is not greater than the threshold amount, the processor returns to 600. - It may be possible to implement a process in which the processor uses only the magnitude of the difference between the velocity of the
upper boom portion 1104 and the velocity of thetruck 10, e.g., using only 606 and 614 without 600, 602, and 610. However, it may be advantageous to use the entire process shown inFIG. 61 , including 600, 602, and 610, as these steps may provide a faster response time. It is further contemplated that the processor may use only the comparison between the magnitude of the total acceleration of theupper boom portion 1104 and the first or second threshold total accelerations, e.g., using only 600, 602, and 610, which may be advantageous because these steps may provide a faster response time and use fewer computational resources. However, it is possible that an impact force on atruck 10 occurring over a long period of time may not be detected with a process using only 600, 602, and 610. - In all examples of the
sensors 420A-420E described herein, thesensors 420A-420E each detect the corresponding parameter(s) and generate one or more signals based on detecting the corresponding parameter(s). TheIMS 420 comprises one or more controllers that are configured to receive the signals, e.g., via thenetwork bus 432 depicted inFIG. 47B . In some examples, the one or more controllers may include thecomputer system 500 that implements one or more of the 424, 426, 428, 430 depicted inmodules FIG. 47B . - The one or more controllers are configured to determine, based on the at least one signal, that the
104, 1104 has deflected relative to theupper boom portion base mount 102, which deflection results from one or more external forces causing the 150, 1150, 2150 to yield. For example, as described herein, each parameter detected by theadapter sensors 420A-420E may be associated with a corresponding predetermined threshold, and determining that the 104, 1104 has deflected relative to theupper boom portion 102, 1102 may comprise comparing a current value for the parameter to the corresponding predetermined threshold for the parameter. In the case of thebase mount limit switch 407, the signal may also include an indication that the lever 407-2 has moved from the upright, closed position shown inFIG. 50 to the deflected, open position shown inFIG. 51 . - In response to determining that the
104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, the one or more controllers may generate an alert. In some examples, the alert may be transmitted to the remote sever, e.g., via theadapter transceiver 402 shown inFIG. 47A . Alternatively, or in addition to, the alert, the one or more controllers may generate an error code in response to determining that the 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield.adapter - Following a determination that the
104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield, it may be desirable to limit operation of theadapter truck 10 to prevent or minimize damage to thetruck 10, thebase mount 102 and theupper boom portion 104, theaccessory 300, and/or adjacent personnel or objects caused by the 104, 1104 potentially being in the deformed position. As shown inupper boom portion FIG. 39 , the operator generally faces away from the 100, 1100 and may be unaware that theboom assembly 104, 1104 has deflected. In one example, based on the error code, theupper boom portion IMS 420 may transmit one or more signals, e.g., to thesteer control module 424, thetraction control module 428, and/or thelift control module 430 shown inFIG. 47B , that cause thebrake 436 to activate and/or causes operation of at least one of thesteer motor 434, thetraction motor 440, or thelift motor 444 to be altered. Activation of thebrake 436 stops rotation of the drive wheel 22 (seeFIG. 39 ) to reduce the speed of thetruck 10. Altering operation of thesteer motor 434 may include limiting a maximum steer angle and/or a rate of turning to prevent thetruck 10 from making a sharp turn with the 104, 1104 in the deformed position. Altering operation of theupper boom portion lift motor 444 may include disabling lift functions, such that theload handling assembly 12 can only be lowered to prevent interference with the 104, 1104 in the deformed position. Alternatively, altering operation of theupper boom portion steer motor 434, thetraction motor 440, and/or thelift motor 444 may include opening themain contactor 438, which shuts off power to thesteer motor 434, thetraction motor 440, and thelift motor 444. - The one or more controllers may also be configured to transmit a signal that causes the
user interface 442 to display an indication of the error code. The indication may include one or more of a symbol or graphic, a light, an audible tone, etc. and may notify the operator that a potential failure has been detected and that the 104, 1104 may be in the deformed position.upper boom portion - With reference to
FIG. 62 , at 700, the at least one controller receives at least one signal from at least onesensor 420A-420E (seeFIGS. 1A and1B ), and at 702, the at least one controller, determines, based on the at least one signal, that the 104, 1104 is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150 to yield. At 704, the at least one controller may generate an error code. In one example, at 706, the at least one controller may transmit a signal that causes a user interface of theadapter truck 10 to display an indication of the error code. In another example in which thetruck 10 comprises abrake 436, asteer motor 434, atraction motor 440, and alift motor 444 as described herein, thebrake 436 may be activated and/or operation of at least one of thesteer motor 434, thetraction motor 440, or thelift motor 444 may be altered based on the error code, at 708. - In one example, as shown in
FIG. 63 , following thetruck 10 being shut off, thetruck 10 may be restarted immediately (i.e., prior to clearing the error code) at 710. Thetruck 10 is then operated in a "limp mode" at 712, where the speed of thetruck 10 is limited, e.g., <1 mph. At 714, thetruck 10 is moved in limp mode from a first location, e.g., a location near where the impact occurred and thetraction motor 440 was shut off, to a second location, a location that is out of a path of travel of other trucks or a service location. The 100, 1100 and/or theboom assembly truck 10 may be inspected for damage, and at 716, at least a portion of the 102, 1102, thebase mount 104, 1104, theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150, and/or the sensor(s) 420A-420E may be replaced. Following installation of theadapter 104, 1104, the error code may be cleared at 718. In some examples, the error code may be cleared automatically upon replacement or installation of theupper boom portion 104, 1104 and restarting of theupper boom portion truck 10. In other examples, the error code may be cleared by resetting thesensor 420A-420E, e.g., moving the lever 407-2 of thelimit switch 407 back to the upright position (seeFIGS. 50 and 51 ). Following clearing of the error code, thetruck 10 is restarted at 720, and normal operation of thetruck 10 may be resumed at 722, after which the process may terminate. - In another example, as shown in
FIG. 64 , following thetruck 10 being shut off, the 100, 1100 and/or theboom assembly truck 10 may be inspected for damage, and at least a portion of the 102, 1102, thebase mount 104, 1104, theupper boom portion 150, 1150, 2150, and/or the sensor(s) 420A-420E may be replaced at 724 prior to attempting to restart theadapter truck 10. As described above, the error code is then cleared at 726, thetruck 10 is restarted at 728, and normal operation of thetruck 10 may be resumed at 730, after which the process may terminate. - Expressions of the inventive concept are set out in the following numbered clauses:
- 1. A boom assembly comprising:
- an upper boom portion, a base mount, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion, the upper boom portion being aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position; and
- an integrity monitoring system comprising at least one sensor associated with the boom assembly,
- wherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed angular position relative to the base mount, and
- wherein the at least one sensor is configured to detect a parameter related to the upper boom portion to indicate that the upper boom portion has deflected such that the upper boom portion is no longer aligned with the base mount.
- 2. The boom assembly of
clause 1, wherein the at least one sensor detects an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount. - 3. The boom assembly of
clause 2, wherein the predetermined threshold is calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold. - 4. The boom assembly of any of
clauses 1 to 3, wherein the at least one sensor detects an angular velocity of the upper boom portion, wherein the angular velocity of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount. - 5. The boom assembly of any of
clauses 1 to 4, wherein the at least one sensor comprises a strain gauge that detects a strain level in the adapter, wherein the strain level in the adapter exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount. - 6. The boom assembly of any of
clauses 1 to 5, wherein the at least one sensor detects a change in a position of the upper boom portion relative to a predetermined reference, wherein the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount. - 7. The boom assembly of any of
clauses 1 to 6, wherein the at least one sensor is configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing the parameter, the boom assembly further comprising at least one controller configured to:- receive the at least one signal; and
- determine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- 8. A materials handling vehicle comprising:
- the boom assembly of any of
clauses 1 to 7;- a power unit;
- a load handling assembly extending from the power unit and comprising a pair of forks; and
- an operator's station comprising an operator's backrest and an operator's platform,
- wherein the boom assembly is associated with the materials handling vehicle, and wherein the at least one sensor of the integrity monitoring system is mounted to at least one of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station.
- the boom assembly of any of
- 9. The materials handling vehicle of clause 8, wherein the at least one sensor is configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing the parameter, the materials handling vehicle further comprising at least one controller configured to:
- receive the at least one signal; and
- determine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- 10. The materials handling vehicle of clause 9, further comprising a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor, and wherein in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield, the at least one controller is configured to generate an error code that activates the brake and/or alters operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor.
- 11. The materials handling vehicle of clause 9 or
clause 10, wherein in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield, the at least one controller is configured to:- generate an error code; and
- transmit a signal that causes a user interface to display an indication of the error code.
- 12. The materials handling vehicle of any of clauses 8 to 11, wherein the at least one sensor detects an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount, optionally wherein the predetermined threshold is calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold.
- 13. The materials handling vehicle of any of clauses 8 to 12, wherein the at least one sensor detects an angular velocity of the upper boom portion, wherein the angular velocity of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- 14. The materials handling vehicle of any of clauses 8 to 13, wherein the at least one sensor comprises a strain gauge that detects a strain level in the adapter, wherein the strain level in the adapter exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- 15. The materials handling vehicle of any of clauses 8 to 14, wherein the at least one sensor detects a change in a position of the upper boom portion relative to a predetermined reference, wherein the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- 16. A method of controlling a materials handling vehicle, the materials handling vehicle comprises:
- a power unit, a load handling assembly, an operator's station, a boom assembly, and an integrity monitoring system;
- wherein the boom assembly comprises a base mount, an upper boom portion, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion, the upper boom portion being aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position; and
- wherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount; and
- wherein the integrity monitoring system comprises at least one controller and at least one sensor mounted to one or more of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station; and
- wherein the method comprises:
receiving, by the at least one controller, at least one signal from the at least one sensor; and determining, by the at least one controller, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount.
- 17. The method of
clause 16, comprising, in response to determining that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount:- generating, by the at least one controller, an error code; and
- transmitting, by the at least one controller, a signal that causes a user interface of the materials handling vehicle to display an indication of the error code.
- 18. The method of
clause 16 or clause 17, wherein the materials handling vehicle further comprises a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor. - 19. The method of
clause 18, comprising, in response to determining that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount:- generating, by the at least one controller, an error code; and/or
- based on the error code or otherwise, activating the brake and/or altering operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor.
- 20. The method of clause 19, wherein the method further comprises one or more of:
- restarting the materials handling vehicle;
- operating the material handling vehicle in limp mode, wherein a speed of the materials handling vehicle is limited;
- moving the materials handling vehicle in limp mode from a first location to a second location;
- replacing at least a portion of one or more of the base mount, the upper boom portion, the adapter, or the at least one sensor;
- clearing the error code;
- restarting the materials handling vehicle; and/or
- resuming normal operation of the materials handling vehicle.
- 21. The method of clause 19 or
clause 20, wherein the method comprises:- replacing at least a portion of one or more of the base mount, the upper boom portion, the adapter, or the at least one sensor;
- clearing the error code;
- restarting the materials handling vehicle; and/or
- resuming normal operation of the materials handling vehicle.
- The terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular examples only and is not intended to be limiting of the disclosure. As used herein, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will be further understood that the terms "comprises" and/or "comprising," when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.
- While particular examples of the present disclosure have been illustrated and described, it would be obvious to those skilled in the art that various other changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present disclosure. It is therefore intended to cover in the appended claims all such changes and modifications that are within the scope of the present disclosure.
Claims (15)
- A boom assembly comprising:an upper boom portion, a base mount, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion, the upper boom portion being aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position; andan integrity monitoring system comprising at least one sensor associated with the boom assembly,wherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed angular position relative to the base mount, andwherein the at least one sensor is configured to detect a parameter related to the upper boom portion to indicate that the upper boom portion has deflected such that the upper boom portion is no longer aligned with the base mount.
- The boom assembly of claim 1, wherein the sensor detects an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The boom assembly of claim 2, wherein the predetermined threshold is calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold.
- The boom assembly of claim 1, wherein the at least one sensor is configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing the parameter, the boom assembly further comprising at least one controller configured to:receive the at least one signal; anddetermine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- A materials handling vehicle comprising:the boom assembly of claim 1;a power unit;a load handling assembly extending from the power unit and comprising a pair of forks; andan operator's station comprising an operator's backrest and an operator's platform, wherein the boom assembly is associated with the materials handling vehicle, andwherein the at least one sensor of the integrity monitoring system is mounted to at least one of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station.
- The materials handling vehicle of claim 5, wherein the at least one sensor is configured to generate at least one signal based on sensing the parameter, the materials handling vehicle further comprising at least one controller configured to:receive the at least one signal; anddetermine, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield.
- The materials handling vehicle of claim 6, further comprising a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor, and wherein in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield, the at least one controller is configured to generate an error code that activates the brake and/or alters operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor.
- The materials handling vehicle of claim 6, wherein in response to determining that the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield, the at least one controller is configured to:generate an error code; andtransmit a signal that causes a user interface to display an indication of the error code.
- The materials handling vehicle of claim 5, wherein the sensor detects an acceleration of the upper boom portion, wherein the acceleration of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount, wherein the predetermined threshold is calculated to correspond to yielding of the adapter which occurs at the predetermined threshold.
- The boom assembly of claim 1, or the materials handling vehicle of claim 5, wherein the sensor detects an angular velocity of the upper boom portion, wherein the angular velocity of the upper boom portion exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The boom assembly of claim 1, or the materials handling vehicle of claim 5, wherein the sensor comprises a strain gauge that detects a strain level in the adapter, wherein the strain level in the adapter exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- The boom assembly of claim 1, or the materials handling vehicle of claim 5, wherein the sensor detects a change in a position of the upper boom portion relative to a predetermined reference, wherein the change in position exceeding a corresponding predetermined threshold is indicative of the upper boom portion no longer being aligned with the base mount.
- A method of controlling a materials handling vehicle, the materials handling vehicle comprises:a power unit, a load handling assembly, an operator's station, a boom assembly, and an integrity monitoring system;wherein the boom assembly comprises a base mount, an upper boom portion, and an adapter coupling the base mount to the upper boom portion, the upper boom portion being aligned with the base mount when the boom assembly is in a normal operating position; andwherein the adapter is configured to (i) maintain the boom assembly in the normal operating position when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces insufficient to cause the adapter to yield; and (ii) yield when the upper boom portion is subjected to one or more external forces sufficient to cause the adapter to yield such that the upper boom portion moves to a deformed position relative to the base mount; andwherein the integrity monitoring system comprises at least one controller and at least one sensor mounted to one or more of the boom assembly, the power unit, the load handling assembly, or the operator's station; andwherein the method comprises:
receiving, by the at least one controller, at least one signal from the at least one sensor; and determining, by the at least one controller, based on the at least one signal, that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount. - The method of claim 13, comprising, in response to determining that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount:generating, by the at least one controller, an error code; andtransmitting, by the at least one controller, a signal that causes a user interface of the materials handling vehicle to display an indication of the error code.
- The method of claim 13 or claim 14, wherein the materials handling vehicle further comprises a brake, a steer motor, a traction motor, and a lift motor; and the method comprises:in response to determining that the upper boom portion has moved to the deformed position relative to the base mount:
generating, by the at least one controller, an error code; andbased on the error code, activating the brake and/or altering operation of at least one of the steer motor, the traction motor, or the lift motor; and
optionally one or more of:restarting the materials handling vehicle;operating the material handling vehicle in limp mode, wherein a speed of the materials handling vehicle is limited;moving the materials handling vehicle in limp mode from a first location to a second location;replacing at least a portion of one or more of the base mount, the upper boom portion, the adapter, or the at least one sensor;clearing the error code;restarting the materials handling vehicle; and/orresuming normal operation of the materials handling vehicle.
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US202363578672P | 2023-08-25 | 2023-08-25 | |
| US202363578769P | 2023-08-25 | 2023-08-25 | |
| US18/733,363 US12540065B2 (en) | 2023-06-08 | 2024-06-04 | Integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| EP4527781A1 true EP4527781A1 (en) | 2025-03-26 |
Family
ID=92712521
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| EP24199096.9A Pending EP4527781A1 (en) | 2023-08-25 | 2024-09-06 | Integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| EP (1) | EP4527781A1 (en) |
Citations (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| DE19745923A1 (en) * | 1997-10-17 | 1999-04-22 | Metz Feuerwehrgeraete Gmbh | Clamp for jib-arm system with support element on vehicle turntable |
| US20060220872A1 (en) * | 2005-03-01 | 2006-10-05 | Brown Mark A | Mounting bracket |
| US8072309B2 (en) | 2006-09-14 | 2011-12-06 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Systems and methods of remotely controlling a materials handling vehicle |
| US9082293B2 (en) | 2006-09-14 | 2015-07-14 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Systems and methods of remotely controlling a materials handling vehicle |
| US9207673B2 (en) | 2008-12-04 | 2015-12-08 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Finger-mounted apparatus for remotely controlling a materials handling vehicle |
| US9645968B2 (en) | 2006-09-14 | 2017-05-09 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Multiple zone sensing for materials handling vehicles |
| EP2987760B1 (en) * | 2014-08-18 | 2019-04-10 | OM Carrelli Elevatori S.p.A. | Industrial truck |
-
2024
- 2024-09-06 EP EP24199096.9A patent/EP4527781A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| DE19745923A1 (en) * | 1997-10-17 | 1999-04-22 | Metz Feuerwehrgeraete Gmbh | Clamp for jib-arm system with support element on vehicle turntable |
| US20060220872A1 (en) * | 2005-03-01 | 2006-10-05 | Brown Mark A | Mounting bracket |
| US8072309B2 (en) | 2006-09-14 | 2011-12-06 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Systems and methods of remotely controlling a materials handling vehicle |
| US9082293B2 (en) | 2006-09-14 | 2015-07-14 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Systems and methods of remotely controlling a materials handling vehicle |
| US9645968B2 (en) | 2006-09-14 | 2017-05-09 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Multiple zone sensing for materials handling vehicles |
| US9207673B2 (en) | 2008-12-04 | 2015-12-08 | Crown Equipment Corporation | Finger-mounted apparatus for remotely controlling a materials handling vehicle |
| EP2987760B1 (en) * | 2014-08-18 | 2019-04-10 | OM Carrelli Elevatori S.p.A. | Industrial truck |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20240353843A1 (en) | System and method for motion control of robots | |
| US8584800B2 (en) | Load monitoring system | |
| KR102304018B1 (en) | Method, apparatus and computer program for preventing collision of automatic driving vehicle | |
| US10597271B2 (en) | Proactively reducing vibrations in an industrial truck | |
| CN110231818A (en) | Method for running vehicle | |
| US12498688B2 (en) | Smart powered industrial vehicle and systems | |
| WO2009130528A1 (en) | Lift truck | |
| EP3932851B1 (en) | Industrial truck with rear axle load sensor | |
| EP4527781A1 (en) | Integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly | |
| US12540065B2 (en) | Integrity monitoring system for a boom assembly | |
| US20170113608A1 (en) | System and method for operating a machine | |
| CN110626259A (en) | Triangular warning frame and collision early warning method thereof | |
| US12467235B2 (en) | Method and control device for operating a self-driving working machine | |
| KR20150041935A (en) | The fork adhesive type wheel loader have a tilting control unit | |
| CN110182207B (en) | Vehicle detection method and device | |
| CN210488312U (en) | Outdoor robot | |
| EP4414234A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for collision avoidance or impact force reduction | |
| KR101798054B1 (en) | System and Method for Laser Guide | |
| CN105150982A (en) | Vehicle safety protection device and method | |
| CN103537029A (en) | Method and device for protection in safety operation range of fire truck | |
| JP2005112540A (en) | Fork lift | |
| CN105599761B (en) | The traveling attitude control method and device of a kind of motion scan vehicle | |
| CN215756218U (en) | Forklift truck | |
| CN112744301A (en) | Auxiliary system for slope operation of working machine and working machine | |
| CN112937729A (en) | Ballast for a rotating tower, rotating tower for an operator vehicle and operator vehicle |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
| STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN PUBLISHED |
|
| AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC ME MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
| P01 | Opt-out of the competence of the unified patent court (upc) registered |
Free format text: CASE NUMBER: APP_23883/2025 Effective date: 20250520 |
|
| STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE |
|
| 17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20250923 |
|
| STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: EXAMINATION IS IN PROGRESS |
|
| 17Q | First examination report despatched |
Effective date: 20251216 |